Yamaha MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual Mox6mox8 En Rm B0
User Manual: Yamaha MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 160
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Reference Manual Contents Using the MOX6/MOX8 Manuals.................................. 2 Master Mode.............................................................. 128 Remote Mode ............................................................ 133 Basic Structure 3 Functional Blocks......................................................... 3 Tone Generator Block .................................................. 4 A/D Input Block ............................................................. 8 Sequencer Block........................................................... 9 Arpeggio Block ........................................................... 11 Controller Block.......................................................... 17 Effect Block ................................................................. 18 Utility Mode ............................................................... 141 Quick Setup............................................................... 151 File Mode ................................................................... 153 Supplementary Information ..........................................158 File/Folder selection............................................................... 158 Playing back a SMF (Standard MIDI file) from USB flash memory ................................................................. 158 Formatting a USB flash memory device ................................ 159 Appendix 160 Internal Memory .......................................................... 22 About MIDI................................................................. 160 Reference 24 Voice Mode.................................................................. 25 Supplementary Information ............................................ 53 Voice Category List ..................................................................53 Setting examples of the Destination.........................................53 Functions of Knobs 1 – 8..........................................................54 Performance Mode ..................................................... 55 Supplementary Information ............................................ 74 Performance Category List ......................................................74 Functions of Knobs 1 – 8..........................................................74 Song Mode .................................................................. 76 Supplementary Information ............................................ 97 Song Playback Types ..............................................................97 Song Track Loop – setting example.........................................99 Punch In/Out (Type = punch).................................................100 Basic Procedure in the Song Job Mode ................................100 Pattern Mode ............................................................. 101 Supplementary Information .......................................... 112 Pattern Playback Types .........................................................112 Loop Recording (Pattern).......................................................113 Mixing Mode .............................................................. 114 Supplementary Information .......................................... 124 Editing a Performance by using the Knobs............................124 Creating an Arpeggio.............................................................125 Storing the Mixing settings as a Mixing Template..................126 Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to update or modify this manual at any time without prior notice. The most up-to-date version is freely available for download from the following web page. http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ Using the MOX6/MOX8 Manuals Your MOX6/MOX8 synthesizer comes with four different reference guides — the Owner’s Manual, the Reference Manual (this document), the Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List. While the Owner’s Manual is packaged together with the synthesizer as a hardcopy booklet, this Reference Manual, Synthesizer Parameter Manual, and the Data List are provided as PDF documents on the bundled CD-ROM. Owner’s Manual (hardcopy booklet) Describes how to set up your MOX6/MOX8 and how to perform basic operations. This manual explains the following operations. • Playing in the Voice mode • Creating a new Performance by using your favorite Voice (Performance Creator) • Playing in the Performance mode • Using a microphone and sounds from other audio devices • Creating an original Song • Making your own Patterns • Connecting to a computer • Using as a master keyboard (Master mode) • Making global system settings (Utility mode) • Saving/loading data (File mode) Reference Manual (this PDF document) Describes the internal design of your MOX6/MOX8 and the various parameters that can be adjusted and set. Synthesizer Parameter Manual (PDF document) Explains the voice parameters, effect types, effect parameters, and MIDI messages that are used for synthesizers incorporating the Yamaha AWM2 sound generators. Read the Owner’s Manual and Reference Manual first and then use this parameter manual, if necessary, to learn more about parameters and terms that relate to Yamaha synthesizers. Data List (PDF document) Provides lists such as the Waveform List, Performance List, Effect Type List, Arpeggio Type List, as well as reference materials such as the MIDI Implementation Chart and Remote Control Function List. Using the Reference Manual Select the mode Select the function • Using the mode tabs along the upper part of each page from the Reference section, you can jump to the page for parameter explanations of the corresponding mode. The list indicated at the VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode Voice Mode Voice Play right of each page in the selected mode is equivalent to the function tree. By clicking the desired item from this list, you can jump to the page for the corresponding function’s explanations. The Voice mode is used for selecting, playing, and editing desired Voices. This section explains each parameter in the four types (Voice Play, Normal Voice Edit, Drum Voice Edit, and Voice Job). Note that available parameters for editing differ depending on the Voice types (Normal Voice and Drum Voice). [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT The Voice Play mode is the main “portal” by which you enter the Voice mode, and it is here where you select and play a Voice. Some of the Voice settings can also be edited in this mode. [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit [F1] PLAY Common Edit [F1] GENERAL 1 • You can also click on desired items and topics you want to refer to 2 3 5 6 [F3] EQ [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit Voice Play display 1 Voice Bank 2 Voice Number [F1] OSC Indicates the currently selected Voice bank and Voice number. [F3] FILTER 3 Favorite Category indicator When assigning the currently selected Voice to the Favorite category, this indicator will appear. [F2] PITCH [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ 4 Category Indicates the Main category and Sub category of the currently selected Voice. • If you want to find information on a specific topic, function or feature, select “Find” or “Search” from the Adobe Reader “Edit” 5 (ArpeggioTempo) Indicates the arpeggio tempo set for the currently selected Voice. NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” 6 OCT (Octave) menu and enter a key word to locate the related information anywhere in the document. Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting. The Arpeggio types are assigned to the buttons with 8th note icons on the display tab. You can call them up by pressing these buttons any time during your keyboard performance. The Arpeggio Type can be set in the Arpeggio Edit display Adobe® Reader® Drum Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit [F1] OSC [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) – [SF6] ARP6 (Arpeggio 6) (page 27). NOTE The most-recent version of [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET 4 in the “Bookmarks” index to the left of the main window, and jump to index if it is not displayed.) Arpeggio Edit [F2] TYPE Press the [VOICE] button. • You can click on any page number from the Table of Contents or the corresponding page. (Click the “Bookmarks” tab to open the [F3] PORTA [F4] EG Voice Play Operation within descriptive text to jump to the corresponding page. [F1] PLAY [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F6] EQ Voice Job can be downloaded from the following web page. http://www.adobe.com/products/reader/ [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY NOTE The names and positions of menu items may vary according to the version of Adobe Reader being used. Information • The illustrations and LCD screens as shown in this Reference Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear somewhat different from those on your instrument. • All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 2 Basic Structure Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block Functional Blocks A/D Input block The MOX6/MOX8 system consists of six main functional blocks: Tone Generator, A/D Input, Sequencer, Arpeggio, Arpeggio block Controller, and Effect. Controller block Sequencer block Effect block Internal memory Controller Section (page 17) Arpeggio Block (page 11) MIDI Message Flow Arpeggio Playback x 4 Preset Arpeggio User Arpeggio Keyboard Controllers Audio Signal Flow Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Effects (page 18) Sequencer Block (page 9) Tone Generator (page 4) 16-Track MIDI Sequencer Songs and Patterns AWM2 Tone Generator 16 Parts Voices and Performances Pattern mode System Effect Insertion Effect x 3 Element EQ Part EQ x 16 Master Effect Master EQ Mixing mode Master mode Remote mode Utility mode Quick setup Song Mixing Pattern Mixing *1 File mode A/D Input (page 8) Appendix MIDI *2 MIDI OUT MIDI IN AUDIO IN AUDIO OUT USB [TO HOST] MIDI [OUT] USB [TO HOST] MIDI [IN] USB [TO HOST] A/D INPUT [L]/[R] USB [TO HOST] OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] Computer External MIDI equipment Computer Microphone, guitar, audio equipment, etc. Computer Powered speakers, etc. *1 Depending on the settings for the audio signal connections, the signals input via the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks may not be sent to the system effect or master effect. *2 The audio signals input via the USB [TO HOST] terminal are output to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks directly, bypassing the A/D Input block and Effect block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) This instrument is equipped with a AWM2 tone generator block. AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) is a synthesis system based on sampled waves (sound material), and is used in many Yamaha synthesizers. For extra realism, each AWM2 Voice uses multiple samples of a real instrument’s waveform. Furthermore, a wide variety of parameters—envelope generator, filter, modulation, and others—can be applied. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 3 Basic Structure Tone Generator Block The tone generator block is what actually produces sound in response to the MIDI messages received from the Sequencer block, Controller block, Arpeggio block and from the external MIDI instrument via the MIDI [IN] terminal or Functional blocks Tone Generator block the USB [TO HOST] terminal. The MIDI messages are assigned to sixteen independent channels, and the instrument is A/D Input block capable of simultaneously playing sixteen separate Parts, via the sixteen MIDI channels. However, the sixteen-channel Sequencer block limit can be overcome by using separate MIDI “ports,” each supporting sixteen channels. The tone generator block of Arpeggio block this instrument can handle MIDI messages over Port 1. The structure of the tone generator block differs depending on Controller block the mode. Effect block Internal memory Tone Generator block in the Voice Mode Reference Voice mode Part structure in the Voice mode Performance mode Only one MIDI channel can be recognized in the Voice mode because only one part is available in this Song mode mode. This status is referred to as a “single timbre” tone generator. A Voice is played from the keyboard, Pattern mode using a single part. To set the MIDI receive channel for single timbre operation (Voice and Performance Mixing mode modes), use the “BasicRcvCh” parameter (page 148) in the Utility MIDI display. In the Voice mode, the Master mode instrument recognizes only data over MIDI Port 1. Remote mode NOTE If you want to play Song data on an external MIDI sequencer or computer consisting of multiple MIDI channels, make sure to use the Song/Pattern mode (page 76). Utility mode Quick setup File mode Voice A program that contains the sonic elements for generating a specific musical instrument sound is referred to as a “Voice.” Internally, there are two Voice types: Normal Voices and Drum Voices. Normal Voices are mainly pitched musical instrument type sounds that can be played over the range of the Appendix MIDI keyboard. Each Voice consists of up to eight Elements (Normal Voice) or up to 73 keys (Drum Voice). An Element or Drum Key is the basic and the smallest unit for a Voice. This means that only one Element or key can produce a musical instrument sound. In addition, a Normal Voice can produce even more realistic sound or various types of sound by combining multiple Elements. Each Voice is created by editing parameters unique to each Element/Key (Element Edit parameters/Key Edit parameters) and parameters common to all the Elements/Keys (Common Edit parameters). NOTE For instructions on editing a Normal Voice, see page 30. For instructions on editing a Drum Voice, see page 47. Normal Voices and Drum Voices Normal Voices This is a Voice which is played conventionally from the keyboard, with standard pitches sounding for each key. A Normal Voice consists of up to eight Elements. Depending on the settings in the Voice Element 2 Element 4 Element 6 Element 1 Element 3 Element 5 Velocity Edit mode, these Elements are sounded simultaneously, or different Elements are sounded according to the note range, velocity range and the XA (Expanded Articulation) settings. The illustration is an example of a Normal Voice. Since the six Elements here are distributed across both the note range of the keyboard and the velocity range, a different Element sounds depending on which note you play and how strongly you play it. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In the note distribution, Elements 1 and 2 sound in the lower range of the keyboard, Elements 3 and 4 sound in the middle range, and Elements 5 and 6 sound in the higher range. In the velocity distribution, Elements 1, 3 and 5 sound when playing the keyboard softly, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 sound when playing it strongly. In a practical example of this in use, a piano Voice could be composed of six different samples. Elements 1, 3 and 5 would be the sounds of the piano played softly, over the respective note ranges, while Elements 2, 4 and 6 would be strongly played sounds, for each respective note range. Actually, the MOX6/MOX8 is even more flexible than this, since it allows up to eight independent Elements. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 4 Basic Structure Drum Voices Drum Voices are mainly percussion/drum sounds that are assigned to individual notes on the keyboard. Unlike Elements, a Drum key is equivalent to the corresponding note, meaning that you cannot change its range. Drum or percussion sounds are assigned to each Drum Key. You can create various types of Drum Voices by changing the drum or percussion sound assigned to each key and edit the parameters Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block such as pitch and EG. Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block C0 C1 C6 Individual drum sounds (different for each key) Internal memory Reference Voice mode Expanded Articulation (XA) Performance mode Song mode Expanded Articulation (XA) is a specially designed tone generation system of the MOTIF XS that Pattern mode provides greater performance flexibility and acoustic realism. This feature, adopted from the MOTIF XS Mixing mode synthesizer, allows you to more effectively recreate realistic sound and natural performance Master mode techniques—such as legato and staccato—and provides other unique modes for random and alternate Remote mode sound changes as you play. Realistic legato performance Conventional synthesizers recreate a legato effect in the mono mode by continuing the volume Utility mode Quick setup File mode envelope of a previous note on to the next one. However, this results in an unnatural sound different from that of an actual acoustic instrument. The MOX6/MOX8 more accurately reproduces a legato effect by allowing specific Elements to be sounded when playing legato and other Elements to be played normally (with the XA Control parameter settings “normal” and “legato”). Appendix MIDI Authentic note release sound Conventional synthesizers cannot adequately produce the sounds of notes on acoustic instruments being released. The MOX6/MOX8 reproduces these special, characteristic sounds by setting the XA Control parameter of certain Elements to “keyOffSound.” Subtle sound variations for each note played Conventional synthesizers attempt to reproduce this by randomly changing the pitch and/or filter. However, this produces an electronic effect and is different from the real sound changes on an acoustic instrument. The MOX6/MOX8 more accurately reproduces these subtle sound variations by using the XA Control parameter settings “waveCycle” and “waveRandom.” Switching among different sounds to recreate the natural performance on an acoustic instrument Acoustic instruments have their own unique characteristics—even specific, unique sounds that are produced only at certain times in a performance. These include the flutter tonguing on a flute or the playing of high harmonics on an acoustic guitar. Conventional synthesizers (before the MOTIF XS series) could realize such sounds, for example, by triggering them through high (strong) velocity. The MOX6/MOX8 recreates these by allowing you to switch between the sounds while you play—using the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1]/[2] buttons and the XA Control parameter settings, “AF1 On,” “AF2 On” and “all AF off.” NOTE You can turn the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1]/[2] button on or off also by transmitting the Control Change number specified as “AF1”/”AF2” (page 146) in the Utility CTL ASN display from an external device. New sounds and new styles of playing The highly versatile functions above can be applied effectively not only to acoustic sounds but also to synthesizer and electronic Voices as well. The XA feature opens up enormous potential for realizing authentic sounds, performing expressively and coming up with creative new styles of playing. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 5 Basic Structure Elements and Drum Keys Functional blocks Elements and Drum Keys are the smallest “building blocks” in the MOX6/MOX8 that comprise a Voice; in fact, only one Element or one Drum Key could be used to create a Voice. These small sound units can be built, enhanced and processed by a variety of traditional synthesizer parameters, such as Oscillator, Pitch, Filter, Amplitude, and LFO (shown below). Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block OSC LFO (Oscillator) Low Frequency Oscillator Controller block Effect block Internal memory Waveform (AWM2) Reference PITCH FILTER AMP Controls the pitch of the sound. Changes the tonal quality of the sound output from the PITCH unit. Controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound output from the FILTER unit. The signals are then sent at this level to the Effect block. Pitch EG (Pitch Envelope Generator) Filter EG (Filter Envelope Generator) Amplitude EG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode Master mode Remote mode Utility mode Quick setup Oscillator File mode This unit outputs the wave which determines the basic pitch. You can assign the waveform (or basic sound material) to each Element of a Normal Voice or each Key of a Drum Voice. In the case of a Normal Voice, you can set the note range for the Element (the range of notes on the keyboard over which the Element will sound) as well as the velocity response (the range of note velocities within which the Appendix MIDI Element will sound). In addition, the XA related parameters of this unit can be set. Each waveform consists of sample(s) created by recording the sound of the actual instrument and assigning appropriate keyboard and velocity settings. Oscillator related parameters can be set in the Oscillator display (pages 38 and 48). Pitch This unit controls the pitch of the sound (wave) output from the Oscillator. In the case of a Normal Voice, you can detune separate Elements, apply Pitch Scaling and so on. Also, by setting the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator), you can control how the pitch changes over time. Pitch related parameters can be set in the PITCH display (page 39) of the Voice Element Edit. Note that the Pitch related parameters of a Drum Voice can be set in the PITCH display (page 49) of Drum Voice Key Edit. Filter This unit modifies the tone of the sound output from Pitch by cutting the output of a specific frequency portion of the sound. Also, by setting the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator), you can control how the Cutoff Frequency of the Filter changes over time. Filter related parameters can be set in the FILTER display (pages 41 and 50) of Voice Element Edit or Drum Voice Key Edit. Amplitude This unit controls the output level (amplitude) of the sound output from the Filter block. The signals are then sent at this level to the Effect block. Also, by setting the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator), you can control how the volume changes over time. Amplitude related parameters can be set in the AMP display (pages 43 and 50) of Voice Element Edit or Drum Voice Key Edit. LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) As its name suggests, the LFO produces a wave of a low frequency. These waves can be used to vary the pitch, filter or amplitude of each Element to create effects such as vibrato, wah and tremolo. LFO can be set independently for each Element; it can also be set globally for all Elements. LFO related parameters can be set in the LFO display (pages 33 and 45) of Voice Common Edit or Voice Element Edit. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 6 Memory structure of Voices Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block Normal Voices Preset Banks 1 – 8 1024 Normal Voices (128 Voices for each Bank) A/D Input block User Banks 1 – 3 384 Voices (128 Voices for each Bank) Sequencer block GM Bank 128 Voices Arpeggio block Controller block Drum Voices 64 Voices Effect block User Drum Bank 32 Voices Internal memory GM Drum Bank 1 Voice Preset Drum Bank Reference Tone Generator block in the Performance mode Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Part structure in the Performance mode In this mode, the tone generator block receives MIDI data over a single channel. This status is referred Pattern mode Mixing mode to as a “single timbre” tone generator. This mode lets you play a Performance (in which multiple Voices Master mode or Parts are combined—in a layer, or in other configurations) using the keyboard. Keep in mind that Remote mode Song data on an external sequencer consisting of multiple MIDI channels will not play back properly in Utility mode this mode. If you are using an external MIDI sequencer or computer to play the instrument, make sure to Quick setup use the Song mode or Pattern mode. File mode Performance Appendix A program in which multiple Voices (Parts) are combined in a layer, or in other configurations is referred to as a “Performance.” Each Performance can contain up to four different Parts (Voices). Each MIDI Performance can be created by editing parameters unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts in Performance mode (page 55). Performance Memory contents Two User Banks are provided. Each Bank contains 128 Performances, for a total of 256 User Performances. Tone Generator block in the Song mode/Pattern mode Part structure of the tone generator block in the Song mode/Pattern mode In these modes, multiple Parts are provided and different Voices and different melodies or phrases can be played back for each Part. A MIDI tone generator that simultaneously receives over multiple MIDI channels and plays multiple instrument Parts is referred to as a “multi-timbral” tone generator. The settings for the multi-timbral tone generator are collectively referred to as a “Mixing.” You can use the Mixing when playing the MOX6/MOX8 sounds by using an external MIDI sequencer as well as using the sequencer block of the instrument. In this case, you should use the Mixing of the Song or Pattern that does not contain any sequence data. About Mixing A program in which multiple Voices are assigned to Parts for multi-timbral play in the Song and Pattern modes is referred to as a “Mixing.” Each Mixing can contain up to 16 parts. Each Mixing can be created by editing parameters unique to each Part and parameters common to all Parts in the Mixing mode (page 114). Also, one Mixing has up to sixteen memory locations for saving Normal Voices. These Voices which are saved are called Mixing Voices. Normally, the Voice stored in the Voice mode is assigned to each MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 7 Mixing Part. In this case, the sound of the Song/Pattern you created may change unexpectedly if you edit or delete the Voice used for the Song/Pattern Mixing in the Voice mode. Mixing Voices are provided to prevent these accidental sound changes. Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Memory structure of Mixing Sequencer block A Mixing program is provided for each Song or Pattern. Selecting a different Song/Pattern calls up a Arpeggio block different Mixing program. A Mixing Voice provides 16 memories for each Mixing program (Song or Controller block Pattern). Selecting a different Song/Pattern calls up the different Mixing Voice as well as the Mixing program. If you wish to use a Mixing Voice of a certain Song/Pattern for another Song/Pattern, execute the Copy operation (page 123) in the Mixing Voice Job. Note that up to 256 Mixing Voices can be stored Effect block Internal memory for all Songs and Patterns. If the memory for Mixing Voices is full, delete the Mixing Voices you don’t need by executing the Delete job of the Mixing Voice job. Reference Voice mode Maximum Polyphony Performance mode Maximum polyphony refers to the highest number of notes that can be sounded simultaneously Song mode from the internal tone generator of the instrument. The maximum polyphony of this synthesizer is 64. When the internal tone generator block receives a number of notes exceeding the maximum polyphony, previously played notes are cut off. Keep in mind this may be especially noticeable with Voices not having decay. Furthermore, the maximum polyphony applies to the number of Pattern mode Mixing mode Master mode Voice Elements used, not the number of Voices. When Normal Voices that include up to eight Remote mode Elements are used, the maximum number of simultaneous notes may be less than 64. Utility mode Quick setup File mode Appendix A/D Input Block MIDI This block handles the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks. Various parameters such as volume, pan, and effect can be set for the audio signal and the sound is output together with other Voices. The Insertion Effect as well as the System Effects can be applied to the audio signal input via the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks. The A/D Input block related parameters can be set in the following display. Mode Display Corresponding page in the Reference Manual Voice mode VCE A/D display in the Utility mode Performance mode A/D IN display in Performance Common Edit Page 145 Page 62 Song/Pattern mode A/D IN display in Mixing Common Edit Page 116 The effect which is applied to the audio signal input from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks is set in the USB I/O display (page 147) of the Utility mode. The gain of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks can be adjusted via the A/D INPUT [GAIN] knob on the panel. Moreover, the on/off setting of the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks can be set via the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF] button. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 8 Basic Structure Sequencer Block This lets you create Songs and Patterns by recording and editing your performances as MIDI data (from the controller block), allowing you to play the data back with the tone generator block. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Sequencer block in the Song mode Controller block Effect block About Songs Internal memory A Song is created by recording your keyboard performance as MIDI sequence data to individual Tracks. A Song on this synthesizer is effectively the same as a Song on a MIDI sequencer, and playback Reference automatically stops at the end of the recorded data. Voice mode Song Track structure Performance mode A Song consists of 16 separate Tracks, a Scene Track, and a Tempo Track. You can record these Tracks by using Realtime recording or Step recording (page 79). Moreover, you can insert or edit the recorded Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode data using Song Edit (page 84). Master mode Sequence Tracks 1 – 16 Remote mode Lets you record MIDI data. Utility mode Scene Track Quick setup Lets you record Scene change settings, such as Track mute and solo. These can be set in the Song File mode Play display (page 76) and recalled during Song playback. During Song playback, the Track mute and solo settings change automatically according to the settings you’ve recorded to the Scene Track. Appendix Tempo Track Lets you record Tempo change settings. During Song playback, the Tempo changes automatically MIDI according to the settings you’ve recorded to this Track. Song Chain This function allows Songs to be “chained” together for automatic sequential playback. You can set the playback order in Song Play (page 76). Song 01 Song 22 Song 15 Sequencer block in the Pattern mode About Patterns In the MOX6/MOX8, the term “Pattern” refers to a relatively short musical or rhythmic Phrase—1 to 256 measures—which is used for looped playback. Therefore, once Pattern playback starts, it continues until you press the [J] (Stop) button. Section Patterns are more than just a single Phrase—they include 16 variations called “Sections.” These Sections can be changed during playback and used as rhythmic/backing variations for the various parts of a Song. For example, you could use one Section for the verse, another for the chorus, and a third for the bridge. The Pattern related settings such as tempo and Mixing do not change even when the Section is switched, keeping the overall playback consistent in feel and rhythm through the changes. You can use the Section function as a convenient compositional tool, instantly creating the backing Pattern variations for a Song, such as melody A, melody B, and main theme. For instructions on changing Patterns and Sections, see the MOX6/MOX8 Owner’s Manual. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 9 Basic Structure Pattern Chain Functional blocks Pattern Chain allows you to string several different Sections (within a single Pattern) together to make a Tone Generator block single, complete Song. You can have the MOX6/MOX8 automatically change Sections by creating a A/D Input block Pattern Chain beforehand, recording Pattern playback with Section changes from the Pattern Chain Sequencer block display. One Pattern Chain can be created for each Pattern in the Pattern Chain display (page 103). You Arpeggio block can also use this feature when creating Songs based on a certain Pattern, since the created Pattern Chain can be converted into a Song in Pattern Chain Edit (page 104). Controller block Effect block Internal memory Section A Section B Section C Reference Voice mode Phrase Performance mode This is the basic MIDI sequence data in a Track—and the smallest unit—used in creating a Pattern. Song mode “Phrases” are short musical/rhythmic passages for a single instrument, such as a rhythm pattern for the Pattern mode rhythm part, a bass line for the bass part, or a chord backing for the guitar part. This synthesizer Mixing mode features memory space for 256 of your own original User Phrases. Master mode NOTE The MOX6/MOX8 provides no Preset Phrases. Remote mode Utility mode Pattern Track Structure Quick setup A Pattern consists of 16 separate Tracks. See “Sequence Tracks 1 – 16” of “Song Track Structure.” File mode (Page 9) Appendix Pattern Tracks and Phrases MIDI A Pattern consists of 16 Tracks to which the Phrase can be assigned. MIDI data cannot be directly recorded to each Track in the Pattern mode. Recording is done to an empty User Phrase. The newly created Phrase is automatically assigned to the recording Track. Track 1 Track 2 : Track 16 Phrase 001 Phrase 002 : Phrase 003 Phrase 001 Phrase 002 Phrase 003 : MIDI data MIDI data MIDI data : Sequencer block applied to both Songs and Patterns MIDI Tracks and Mixing settings MIDI Tracks are created by recording your keyboard performance in the Song Record mode/Pattern Record mode. MIDI sequence data is recorded to the MIDI Track and the Normal Voice or Drum Voice is assigned to the Mixing part corresponding to the Track. To edit the Mixing parameters such as Voice, volume and pan for each Track, press the [MIXING] button to enter the Mixing mode (page 114), then edit them for the Mixing Part corresponding to the desired Track. Note that Track 1 does not always correspond to Mixing Part 1. As illustrated below, each Track of the Song sequence data and each Mixing Part of the tone generator block are connected when the output channel (TxCH) equals the receive channel (RcvCH). In other words, the sequence data of each Track plays the corresponding Parts (those having the same MIDI channel assignment) in the tone generator block. The Transmit Channels of each Track can be set in the TRACK display (page 78) of the Song mode or Pattern mode while the Receive Channels of each Part can be set in the VOICE display (page 117) of Mixing Edit. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 10 Basic Structure Song/Pattern Sequencer block Tone generator block Sequence data (Song, Pattern) Mixing Recording Track 1 Track 2 Track 3 : Track 16 Functional blocks Tone Generator block TxCH 2 2 3 : 16 RcvCH 2 3 3 : 16 Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 : Part 16 A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block Internal memory NOTE When you play the keyboard in the Mixing mode, the selected Part will not sound, but the Part assigned to the same numbered Track as the selected part will sound, For example, when setting as in the above illustration, playing the keyboard sounds Part 1 even if Part 2 is selected in the Mixing mode. Reference Voice mode Performance mode Sequencer block applied to the Performance mode Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode Performance Recording Master mode You can record your keyboard performance in the Performance mode to the Song or Pattern. You can Remote mode record knob operations, controller operations and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing Utility mode to the specified Track as MIDI events. Quick setup NOTE In Performance recording, operating the knobs only result in the Control Change messages being recorded; File mode Parameter Change messages cannot be recorded. For details regarding Control Change messages, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Arpeggio playback data for Parts 1 – 4 of the Performance will be recorded to the specified four Tracks (in the REC TR display of Performance Record) of the Song/Pattern respectively. Your keyboard Appendix MIDI performance and controller/knob operations (common to Parts 1 – 4) will be recorded to Tracks 1 – 4 separately. NOTE For details on operation, refer to the MOX6/MOX8 Owner’s Manual. Arpeggio Block This block lets you automatically trigger musical and rhythmic phrases using the current Voice by simply pressing a note or notes on the keyboard. The Arpeggio sequence also changes in response to the actual notes or chords you play, giving you a wide variety of inspiring musical phrases and ideas—both in composing and performing. Four Arpeggio types can be played back at the same time even in the Song mode and Pattern mode. Arpeggio categories The Arpeggio types are divided into 18 categories as listed below. The categories are based on instrument type. Category List ApKb Acoustic Piano & Keyboard Lead Synth Lead Organ Organ PdMe Synth Pad / Musical Effect GtPl Guitar / Plucked CPrc Chromatic Percussion GtMG Guitar for “Mega Voice” DrPc Drum / Percussion Bass Bass Seq Synth Seq BaMG Bass for “Mega Voice” Chord Chord Seq Strng Strings Hybrd Hybrid Seq Brass Brass Cntr Control RdPp Reed / Pipe NOTE Categories named “GtMG” and “BaMG” include Arpeggio types appropriate for using with a Mega Voice. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 11 Basic Structure Mega Voices and Mega Voice Arpeggios Functional blocks Normal Voices use velocity switching to make the sound quality and/or level of a Voice change according to how strongly or softly you play the keyboard—giving greater authenticity and natural response to these Voices. However Mega Voices have a very complex structure with many different layers that is not suitable for playing manually. Mega Voices were developed specifically to be played by Mega Voice arpeggios to produce incredibly realistic results. You should always use Mega Voices with Mega Voice Arpeggios (included in “GtMG” and “BaMG” category). For details regarding the Mega Voice Arpeggios, see the “Voice Type” of the “Arpeggio Type List” in the “Data List” PDF document. Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block Internal memory Sub categories Reference The Arpeggio categories are divided into the sub categories listed below. Because the sub categories are listed based Voice mode on the music genre, it is easy to find the sub category appropriate for your desired music style. Performance mode Song mode Sub Category List Pattern mode Rock Rock Z.Pad Zone Velocity for Pad* Mixing mode R&B R&B Filtr Filter Master mode Elect Electronic Exprs Expression Remote mode Jazz Jazz Pan Pan World World Mod Modulation Genrl General Pbend Pitch Bend Quick setup Comb Combination Asign Assign 1/2 File mode Zone Zone Velocity* NOTE Arpeggio types belonging to the Sub Categories marked with an asterisk (*) contain some velocity ranges, to which each has a different phrase assigned. When a type of these categories is selected in the Voice mode, it is a good idea to set the Velocity Limit of each Element to the same range as below. Utility mode Appendix MIDI Velocity ranges of each Arpeggio type. 2Z_*****: 1 – 90, 91 – 127 4Z_*****: 1 – 70, 71 – 90, 91 – 110, 111 – 127 8Z_*****: 1 – 16, 17 – 32, 33 – 48, 49 – 64, 65 – 80, 81 – 96, 97– 108, 109 – 127 PadL_*****: 1 – 1, 2 – 2, 3 – 127 PadH_*****: 1 – 112, 113 – 120, 121 – 127 Arpeggio Type Name The Arpeggio Types are named according to certain rules and abbreviations. Once you understand these rules and abbreviations, you’ll find it easy to browse through and select the desired Arpeggio Types. Arpeggio type with “_ES” at the end of the type name (example: HipHop1_ES) These Arpeggio types use the same multi Track Arpeggio architecture as the MOTIF ES. This ES type of arpeggio has the following benefits: 1) These arpeggios can create complex notes and chords even when triggered by one note. 2) The arpeggio closely follows the notes played on the keyboard (only in the area where the arpeggio is assigned), allowing a good deal of harmonic freedom and the possibility to “solo” using these arpeggios. Arpeggio type with “_XS” at the end of the type name (example: Rock1_XS) These Arpeggios use a newly developed chord recognition technology to determine what notes should be played back by the Arpeggio. This XS type of arpeggio has the following benefits: 1) The arpeggios respond only to an area on the keyboard where an XS type of arpeggio is assigned. Other areas of the keyboard do not affect the chord recognition. This allows very natural keyboard playing across the entire keyboard with arpeggio generated bass and backing parts. 2) The arpeggio will always play harmonically correct parts. These are especially useful for bass and chordal backing parts. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 12 Arpeggio type with a normal name (example: UpOct1) In addition to the above types, there are three playback types: the Arpeggios created for use of Normal Voices and played back using only the played notes and their octave notes (page 15), the Arpeggios created for use of Drum Voices (page 16), and Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (page 16). Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block How to use the Arpeggio Type List Controller block The Arpeggio Type list in the “Data List” PDF document contains the following columns. Effect block Internal memory Main Sub ARP Category Category No. ARP Name Time Original Random Signature Length Tempo Accent SFX Voice Type ApKb Rock 1 70sRockB 4/4 2 130 Acoustic Piano ApKb Rock 2 70sRockC 4/4 1 130 : ApKb Rock 3 70sRockD 4/4 2 130 ApKb Rock 4 70sRockE 4/4 4 130 ApKb Rock 5 70sRockF 4/4 2 130 ApKb Rock 6 70sRockG 4/4 1 130 ApKb Rock 7 70sRockH 4/4 1 130 NOTE Note that this list is for illustration purposes only. For a complete listing of the Arpeggio Types, see the “Data List” PDF Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode document. Master mode 1 Main Category Indicates an Arpeggio Main Category. 2 Sub Category Indicates an Arpeggio Sub Category. Remote mode Utility mode Quick setup File mode 3 ARP No (Arpeggio Number) Indicates the Arpeggio type number. 4 ARP Name (Arpeggio Name) Appendix MIDI Indicates the Arpeggio Name. 5 Time Signature Indicates the time signature or meter of the Arpeggio type. 6 Length Indicates the data length (amount of measures) of the Arpeggio type. When the Loop parameter *1 is set to “off,” the Arpeggio plays back for this length and stops. 7 Original Tempo Indicates the appropriate tempo value of the Arpeggio type. Note that this tempo is not set automatically when selecting an Arpeggio type. 8 Accent The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the Accent Phrase feature (page 14). 9 Random SFX The circle indicates that the Arpeggio uses the SFX feature (page 15). ) Voice Type Indicates the voice type appropriate for the Arpeggio Type. When the “VoiceWithARP” (Voice with Arpeggio) *2 is set to “on” in the Song/Pattern Record, the voice of this type is automatically selected. *1 The Loop parameter can be set in the PLAY FX display of Arpeggio Edit for Voice mode (page 28), Performance mode (page 58), and Song/Pattern mode (page 83). *2 The “VoiceWithARP” parameter can be set in the MAIN display of the Arpeggio Edit for Song/Pattern mode (page 83). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 13 Basic Structure Arpeggio related settings There are several methods for triggering and stopping the Arpeggio playback. In addition, you can set whether or not SFX sounds and special Accent Phrases are triggered along with the normal sequence data. This section covers the Arpeggio related parameters which can be set in the Voice, Performance and Mixing modes. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Turning Arpeggio playback on/off Controller block The following three settings are available for turning the Arpeggio playback on/off. To play the Arpeggio only when the note is pressed: Set the “Hold” parameter to “off” and the “TriggerMode” parameter to “gate.” To continue the Arpeggio even if the note is released: Set the “Hold” parameter to “on” and the “TriggerMode” parameter to “gate.” To toggle the Arpeggio playback on/off whenever the note is pressed: Set the “TriggerMode” parameter to “toggle.” The “Hold” parameter can be set to either “on” or “off.” NOTE For the displays including the “Hold” and “TriggerMode” parameters, see MAIN display and PLAY FX display Effect block Internal memory Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode of the Arpeggio Edit for Voice mode (page 28), Performance mode (page 58), and Song/Pattern mode (page 83). Pattern mode NOTE When receiving the MIDI sustain message (control change #64) with “Arp Sw” set to “on,” you can obtain the Master mode same result by setting “Arp Hold” to “on.” Mixing mode Remote mode Utility mode Using the knobs to control Arpeggios When the ARP lamp is turned on by pressing the Knob Function 2 button a few times, you can use Quick setup File mode knobs 5 – 8 to control Arpeggio playback. Try this out and listen for the changes in the sound. For details regarding the effect of the knobs 5 – 8, see “Knob Functions” of the Voice mode (page 54). Press this button a few times so that the lamp lights Appendix MIDI Arpeggio functions controlled via the knobs Accent Phrase Accent Phrases are composed of sequence data included in some Arpeggio types, sounding only when you play notes at a velocity higher (stronger) than that specified in the Accent Velocity Threshold parameter. If it is hard to play at velocities necessary to trigger the Accent Phrase, set the “AccntVelTh” (Accent Velocity Threshold) parameter to a lower value. NOTE For the displays including the “AccntVelTh” parameters, see PLAY FX display of the Arpeggio Edit for Voice mode (page 28), Performance mode (page 58), and Song/Pattern mode (page 83). NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the “Data List” PDF document. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 14 Basic Structure Random SFX Functional blocks Some Arpeggio types feature a Random SFX function which will trigger special sounds (such as guitar Tone Generator block fret noises) when the note is released. The following parameters affecting Random SFX are provided. A/D Input block Sequencer block For turning the Random SFX on/off: Random SFX parameter For setting the volume of the SFX sound: SFXVelOffset (Random SFX Velocity Offset) parameter For determining whether or not the volume of the SFX sound is controlled by velocity: SFXKeyOnCtrl (Random SFX Key on Control) parameter Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block Internal memory NOTE For the displays including the “RandomSFX,” “SFXVelOffset,” and “SFXKeyOnCtrl” parameters, see PLAY FX display of the Arpeggio Edit for Voice mode (page 28), for Performance mode (page 58), for Song/Pattern mode (page 83). NOTE For information on Arpeggio types that use this function, refer to the “Arpeggio Type List” in the “Data List” PDF document. Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Arpeggio setting displays Pattern mode Each mode has one Arpeggio Edit display for the Arpeggio settings. If you press the ARP [EDIT] button Mixing mode in any of the modes, the Arpeggio Edit display will be shown. Master mode Remote mode Utility mode Arpeggio playback types Quick setup File mode There are three main Arpeggio playback types as described below. Arpeggios for Normal Voices Arpeggio types (belonging to all categories except for DrPC and Cntr) created for use of Normal Voices Appendix MIDI have the following three playback types. Playback of played notes only The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note(s) and octave notes. Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played notes These Arpeggio types have the several sequences each of which is suited for a certain chord type. Even if you press only one note, the Arpeggio is played back using the programmed sequence— meaning that notes other than the ones you play may be sounded. Pressing another note triggers a transposed sequence using the pressed note as the new root note. Adding notes to those already held changes the sequence accordingly. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_ES” at the end of the type name. Playback of a programmed sequence according to the played chord These Arpeggio types created for use with Normal Voices are played back to match the chord type determined by detecting the notes you play on the keyboard. Arpeggios with this playback type have “_XS” at the end of the type name. NOTE When the “KeyMode” parameter is set to “sort” or “sortdirect,” the same sequence is played back no matter what order you play the notes. When the “KeyMode” parameter is set to “thru” or “thrudirect,” a different sequence is played back depending on the order you play the notes. NOTE Since these types are programmed for Normal Voices, using them with Drum Voices may not produce musically appropriate results. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 15 Arpeggios for Drum/Percussion Voices (Category: DrPc) Basic Structure Functional blocks These Arpeggio types are programmed specifically for use with Drum Voices, giving you instant access Tone Generator block to various rhythm patterns. Three different playback types are available. A/D Input block Sequencer block Playback of a drum pattern Arpeggio block Pressing any note(s) will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Controller block Playback of a drum pattern, plus additional played notes (assigned drum instruments) Effect block Internal memory Pressing any note will trigger the same rhythm pattern. Adding notes to the one already held produces additional sounds (assigned drum instruments) for the drum pattern. Playback only of the played notes (assigned drum instruments) Playing a note or notes will trigger a rhythm pattern using only the notes played (assigned drum instruments). Keep in mind that even if you play the same notes, the triggered rhythm pattern differs Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode depending on the order of the notes played. This gives you access to different rhythm patterns using Pattern mode the same instruments simply by changing the order in which you play the notes, when the “KeyMode” Mixing mode parameter is set to “thru” or “thrudirect.” Master mode Remote mode NOTE The three playback types above are not distinguished by category name or type name. You'll have to actually play the types and hear the difference. NOTE Since these types are programmed for Drum Voices, using them with Normal Voices may not produce musically appropriate results. Arpeggios containing mainly non-note events (Category: Cntr) Utility mode Quick setup File mode Appendix MIDI These arpeggio types are programmed primarily with Control Change and Pitch Bend data. They are used to change the tone or pitch of the sound, rather than play specific notes. In fact, some types contain no note data at all. When using a type of this category, set the “KeyMode” parameter to “direct,” “thrudirect,” or “sortdirect.” NOTE For the displays including the “KeyMode” parameters, see the PLAY FX display of the Arpeggio Edit for Voice mode (page 28), Performance mode (page 58), or for Song/Pattern mode (page 83). Tips for Arpeggio playback Arpeggios not only provide inspiration and full rhythmic passages over which you can perform, they give you quality MIDI data you can use in creating Songs, or fully formed backing parts to be used in your live performances. For instructions on using Arpeggio, see the “Quick Guide” in the Owner’s Manual. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 16 Basic Structure Controller Block This block consists of the keyboard, Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels, Ribbon Controller, Knobs, Sliders and so on. The keyboard itself doesn’t generate sounds, but instead generates/transmits note on/off, velocity and other information Functional blocks Tone Generator block (MIDI messages) to the synthesizer’s tone generator block when you play notes. The controllers also generate/transmit A/D Input block MIDI messages. The synthesizer’s tone generator block produces sound according to the MIDI messages transmitted Sequencer block from the keyboard and controllers. Arpeggio block Controller block Keyboard Effect block Internal memory The keyboard transmits the note on/off messages to the Tone Generator Block (for sounding) and Sequencer Block (for recording). The keyboard is also used for triggering Arpeggio playback. You can change the note range of the keyboard in octaves by using the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons, transpose the notes by using the TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] buttons, and set how the actual velocity is generated according to the strength with which you play notes. Reference Voice mode Performance mode Pitch Bend wheel Song mode Pattern mode Use the Pitch Bend wheel to bend notes up (roll the wheel away from you) or Pitch up down (roll the wheel toward you) while playing the keyboard. Roll the wheel Mixing mode upward/downward to bend the pitch upward/downward. This wheel is self- Master mode centering and will automatically return to normal pitch when released. Each Remote mode preset Voice has its own default Pitch Bend Range setting. The Pitch Bend Range setting can be changed in the GENERAL display (page 30) of Voice Utility mode Pitch down Quick setup Common Edit, the VOICE display (page 64) of Performance Part Edit, or the VOICE display (page 117) of Mixing Part Edit. From these displays you can also reverse the Pitch Bend function—so File mode that moving the wheel up lowers the pitch, and moving it down raises the pitch. Functions other than Pitch Bend can be assigned to the Pitch Bend wheel in the CTL SET display (page 32) of Voice Edit. Appendix MIDI Modulation wheel Even though the Modulation wheel is conventionally used to apply vibrato to the sound, many of the preset Voices have other functions and effects Maximum assigned to the wheel. The more you move this wheel up, the greater the effect that is applied to the sound. To avoid accidentally applying effects to the current Voice, make sure the Modulation wheel is set to minimum before you start playing. Various functions can be assigned to the Modulation wheel Minimum in the CTL SET display (page 32) of the Voice Common Edit. Assignable Function buttons According to the XA (Expanded Articulation) Control settings in the OSC display (page 38) of Voice Element Edit, you can call up specific Elements of the current Voice by pressing each of these buttons during your keyboard performance. You can select how the on/off status of these buttons is switched by using the Assignable Function 1 Mode and Assignable Function 2 Mode parameters in the GENERAL display (page 30) of Voice Common Edit . Furthermore, you can assign various functions (other than calling up specific Elements) to these buttons in the CTL SET display (page 32) of Voice Edit. Knobs These eight knobs let you change various aspects of the Voice’s sound in real time—while you play. The eight sliders let you adjust the volume of the Voice Elements, Performance Parts and Mixing Parts. For instructions on using the knobs in the Voice/Performance mode, see the Owner’s Manual. For instructions on using the knobs in the Song/Pattern mode, see page 124. DAW Remote Press the [DAW REMOTE] to enter the Remote mode. Entering the Remote mode will change the functions of the panel buttons— with the exception of the A/D INPUT [ON/OFF], OCTAVE [-]/[+], TRANSPOSE [-]/[+] and [UTILITY] buttons—to those exclusive to this mode. For details, see the Remote mode of the “Reference” section on page 133. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 17 Effect Block This block applies effects to the output of the tone generator block as well as audio input block, processing and enhancing the sound. Effects are applied in the final stages of editing, letting you change the sound as desired. Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Effect structure Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block System Effects – Reverb and Chorus Internal memory System Effects are applied to the overall sound. With System Effects, the sound of each Part is sent to the effect according to the Effect Send Level for each Part. The processed sound (referred to as “wet”) is sent back to the mixer according to the Return Level, and output—after being mixed with the unprocessed “dry” sound. This instrument is equipped with Reverb and Chorus as System Effects. In Reference Voice mode addition, you can set the Send Level from Chorus to Reverb. This parameter is used to apply Reverb to Performance mode the signals output from the Chorus. You can get a natural effect by applying Reverb depth to the Chorus Song mode sound with the same level as that of the dry sound. Pattern mode Mixing mode Insertion Effects Insertion Effects can be applied individually to each of specified parts before merging signals of all parts. It should be used for sounds for which you want to drastically change the character. Each Voice Master mode Remote mode Utility mode features one set which has A and B units. You can set different Effect types to the Insertion Effects A and Quick setup B, or apply one Vocoder effect to Insertion Effects A and B. These settings can be set in the CONNECT File mode display (page 35) of the Voice Common Edit. This synthesizer features three sets of Insertion Effects. They can be applied to three Parts (maximum) of the Performance, Song or Pattern. Keep in mind that in the Performance and Mixing (Song/Pattern) mode, the Vocoder effect can be applied only to Part 1. This means that the Vocoder effect does not Appendix MIDI work if you assign the Voice (to which the Vocoder is applied in the Voice mode) to other parts (Part 2 or higher). Master Effect This block applies effects to the final stereo output signal of the entire sound. Multiple Effect types are available. Element EQ Element EQ is applied to each Element of the Normal Voice and each key of the Drum Voice. You can specify one of three different EQ shapes, including shelving and peaking. NOTE Element EQ does not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks. Part EQ/Common EQ This 3-band parametric EQ is applied to each part of the Performance/Mixing. The high band and low band are of the shelving type. The middle band is the peaking type. The Common EQ parameters offset the settings of the Part EQ parameters. NOTE Part EQ and Common EQ do not affect the Input signals from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks. Master EQ Master EQ is applied to the final (post-effect), overall sound of the instrument. In this EQ, all five bands can be set to peaking, with shelving being available also for the lowest and highest bands. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 18 Basic Structure Effect connection in each mode Functional blocks Tone Generator block In the Voice mode A/D Input block 1 Element EQ applied to each Element (for a Normal Voice) and each Key (for a Drum Voice) Voice Element or Key Element EQ Settings: Can be set in the EQ display (pages 46 and 51) of Voice Element Edit/Voice Key Edit. Element 1 – 8 Drum Key C0 – C6 2 Common EQ applied to all Elements and Keys Settings: Set in the EQ display (page 32) of Voice Common Edit. Common EQ 3 Selection of which Insertion Effect, A or B, is applied to each Element/Key Settings: Set in “EL: OUT”(page 35) or “KEY: OUT”(page 48) in the Insertion A EFFECT display of Voice Common Edit, or set in “InsEffectOut” (page 39) in the OSC display of Voice Element Edit (or Key Edit). Insertion B Send Level NOTE These two display types are linked and feature the same settings, only in different formats. Chorus Settings: Set in the CONNECT display (page 35) and the INSA display/ Reverb Chorus To Reverb Return Level 4 Insertion Effect A/B related parameters INSB display (page 36) of Voice Common Edit. 5 Reverb and Chorus related parameters Settings: Set in the CONNECT display (page 35) and the CHORUS display/REVERB display (page 36) of Voice Common Edit. Sequencer block Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block Internal memory Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode Master mode Remote mode Utility mode Quick setup File mode 6 Master Effect related parameters Master Effect Settings: Set in the MFX display (page 144) of the Utility mode. 7 Master EQ related parameters Settings: Set in the MEQ display (page 144) of the Utility mode. Appendix MIDI NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks in Master EQ MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual the Voice mode, the effect is set in the VCE A/D display of the Utility mode. First, set the Insertion Effects. Then, making sure “Mode” (page 147) is set to “1StereoRec” in the USB I/O display of the Utility mode, set the level of the signal sent to Chorus and Reverb. When “Mode” is set to “VST” or “2StereoRec,” the signal which is output from the Insertion Effect will be directly output to the USB [TO HOST] terminal or OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. 19 Basic Structure In the Performance mode Functional blocks 1 Part EQ applied to each Part Performance Settings: Set in the EQ display (page 67) of Performance Part Edit. Part EQ Insertion A/B Voice 2 Selection of the Parts to which the Insertion Effect is applied Settings: Set in the INS SW display (page 64) of Performance Common Edit. Part 1 – 4 A/D Part Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Controller block Effect block Send Level 3 Reverb and Chorus related parameters Chorus Reverb Chorus To Reverb Settings: Set in the CONNECT display (page 63), CHORUS display and REVERB display (page 64) of Performance Common Edit, and the EF SEND display (page 66) of Performance Part Edit. 4 Master Effect related parameters Settings: Set in the MFX display (page 60) of Performance Common Edit. 5 Master EQ related parameters Return Level Settings: Set in the MEQ display (page 61) of Performance Common Edit. Master Effect NOTE The Effect settings of 1, 3, and 4 in the Voice mode are available for up to three parts for which the Insertion Effect is turned on. NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks in Master EQ the Performance mode, the effect is set in the A/D IN display of Performance Common Edit. First, set the Insertion Effects. Then, making sure that “Mode” (page 147) is set to “1StereoRec” in the USB I/O display of the Utility mode, set the level of the signal sent to Chorus and Reverb. When “Mode” is set to “VST” or “2StereoRec,” the signal which is output from the Insertion Effect will be directly output to the USB [TO HOST] terminal or OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. Internal memory Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode Master mode Remote mode Utility mode Quick setup File mode Appendix MIDI In the Mixing mode 1 Part EQ applied to each Part Mixing Part Part EQ Settings: Set in the EQ display (page 118) of Mixing Part Edit. Voice Insertion A/B 2 Selection of the Parts to which the Insertion Effect is applied Settings: Set in the EFFECT display (page 116) of Mixing Common Part 1 – 16 A/D Part Edit. Send Level Chorus 3 Reverb and Chorus related parameters Settings: Set in the EFFECT display (page 116) of Mixing Common Edit. Reverb Chorus To Reverb 4 Master Effect related parameters Settings: Set in the MFX display (page 116) of Mixing Common Edit. 5 Master EQ related parameters Return Level Settings: Set in the MEQ display (page 116) of Mixing Common Edit. NOTE The Effect settings of 1, 3, and 4 in the Voice mode are available Master Effect Master EQ MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual for up to three parts for which the Insertion Effect is turned on. NOTE Regarding the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks in the Song/Pattern mode, the effect is set in the A/D IN display of the Mixing Common Edit. First, set the Insertion Effects. Then, making sure that “Mode” (page 147) is set to “1StereoRec” in the USB I/O display of the Utility mode, set the level of the signal sent to Chorus and Reverb. When “Mode” is set to “VST” or “2StereoRec,” the signal which is output from the Insertion Effect will be directly output to the USB [TO HOST] terminal or OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks. 20 Basic Structure About the Vocoder Effect MOX6/MOX8 features a Vocoder effect. Vocoder is a distinctive, “robot voice” effect which extracts the characteristic of the microphone sound and adds it to the sound via your keyboard performance. The human voice consists of sounds Functional blocks Tone Generator block generated from the vocal cords, and filtered by the throat, nose and mouth. These resonant sections have specific A/D Input block frequency characteristics and they function effectively as a filter, creating many formants (harmonic content). The Sequencer block Vocoder effect extracts the filter characteristics of the voice from the microphone input and recreates the vocal formants Arpeggio block by the use of multiple band pass filters. The machine-like ‘robot’ voice is created by passing the pitched sounds of Controller block musical instruments (such as a synthesizer sound) through the filters. For instructions on using the Vocoder effect, see Effect block the Owner’s Manual. Internal memory Extracting the characteristic of the input voice Reference Mic Input Voice mode Performance mode Keyboard performance Creating formants Robot-like voice Song mode Pattern mode Mixing mode Vocoder Master mode Remote mode Utility mode About Effect categories, Effect types, and Effect parameters Quick setup For information regarding the effect categories of this instrument and the effect types contained in their categories, see the “Effect Type List” in the “Data List” PDF document. For information on the effect parameters which can be set in the each effect type, see the “Effect Parameter List” in the “Data List” PDF document. For information on the descriptions of each effect category, each effect type, and each effect parameter, see the “Synthesizer Parameters Manual” PDF documentation. File mode Appendix MIDI About Preset settings Preset settings for parameters of each effect type are provided as templates and can be selected in the Effect Type selection display. To get a desired effect sound, try first selecting one of the Presets close to your imagined sound, then change the parameters as necessary. Preset settings can be determined by setting “Preset” in each effect parameter display. For information on each effect type, see the “Data List” PDF document. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 21 Basic Structure Internal Memory The MOX6/MOX8 creates a variety of different kinds of data, including Voice, Performance, Song, and Pattern. This section describes how to maintain the various types of data and use the memory devices/media for storing them. Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block Sequencer block Arpeggio block Internal memory of the MOX6/MOX8 Controller block Effect block Internal data communication Internal Memory Recall Buffer Compare Buffer (DRAM) Data communication between this synthesizer and an external device Preset Data (ROM) • Voice • Preset Arpeggio • Demo Excluding Master and Utility settings Internal memory Reference MIDI instrument or computer Voice mode Sequence software MOX6/MOX8 Editor Performance mode Song mode Bulk Dump Pattern mode User Memory Bu lk Edit Buffer (DRAM) Du m p Mixing mode Master mode USB Flash Memory Remote mode Utility mode Flash ROM File mode • Voice Edit Store • Mixing Voice Edit • Performance Record • User Performance *2 • User Arpeggio • Song Record • Song • Song Mixing Edit • Song Mixing *1 • Song Chain Store • Song Chain • Pattern Record • Pattern Patch • Pattern • Pattern Mixing • Phrase • Pattern Mixing Edit *1 • Pattern Chain • Utility and Quick Setup • Master Edit Store • System settings File extensions “.X4V” Load/Save (executed in the File mode) • User Voice (Normal, Drum) • Performance Edit • Pattern Chain Quick setup Appendix File extensions “.X4G” MIDI File extensions “.MID” File extensions “.X4S” File extensions “.X4A” (including all data in User Memory) File extensions “.MID” File extensions “.X4P” (Utility settings + Sequencer Setup settings + Mixing Template) • User Master *1 The Mixing settings can be stored/recalled as a template in the Song Mixing Job/Pattern Mixing Job. *2 You can convert the MIDI sequence data recorded in the Song Record/Pattern Record to Arpeggio data. This can be executed with the following operations: [SONG] [JOB] [F5] Track 07: Put Track to Arpeggio or [PATTERN] [JOB] [F5] Track 07: Put Track to Arpeggio Flash ROM ROM (Read Only Memory) is memory designed specifically for reading out data, and as such data cannot be written to it. Unlike conventional ROM, Flash ROM can be overwritten—allowing you to store your own original data. The contents of Flash ROM are maintained even when the power is turned off. DRAM RAM (Random Access Memory) is memory designed specifically for data writing and data reading operations. There are two different kinds of RAM, depending on the condition for storing the data: SRAM (Static RAM) and DRAM (Dynamic RAM). The MOX6/MOX8 is equipped with only DRAM. Because data contained in DRAM is lost when the power is turned off, you should always store any data residing in DRAM to the Flash ROM or a USB flash memory before turning off the power. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 22 Edit buffer & User memory The edit buffer is the memory location for edited data of these types: Voice, Performance, Master, Song Mixing, and Pattern Mixing. Data edited in this location will be stored to the User Memory. In Voice/ Performance/Master/Mixing mode, the edit buffer is the memory location only for one program. Therefore, if you select another Voice, Performance, Master, Song, or Pattern, the entire contents of the Basic Structure Functional blocks Tone Generator block A/D Input block edit buffer will be rewritten with the newly selected Voice/Performance/Mixing data. Make sure to store Sequencer block any important data before selecting another Voice, etc. In Song/Pattern mode, the edit buffer for the Arpeggio block sequencer settings is the memory location for the entire programs of both modes (64 x 2). Therefore, Controller block even if you select another mode (Song mode or Pattern mode) or another Song or Pattern, the Effect block sequence data of old Songs/Patterns will be kept. Make sure to store the sequence data before turning Internal memory off the power, because the kept sequence data will be lost when the power is turned off. If you store the sequence data, all Song data and all Pattern data including the Mixing settings will be stored to User memory. Edit buffer and Recall buffer If you’ve selected another Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern without storing the one you were editing, you can recall your original edits, since the edit buffer’s contents are stored on backup memory. If Reference Voice mode Performance mode Song mode you’ve selected another Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern without storing the one you were editing, you Pattern mode can recall your original edits. Mixing mode NOTE Keep in mind that the recall buffer is not available in the Master Edit mode. Master mode Remote mode Utility mode Quick setup File mode Appendix MIDI MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 23 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Reference This section provides a detailed description of the parameters used to configure your MOX6/MOX8. Display’s Basic Configuration 1 2 3 4 6 5 1 Indicates the selected Track. 2 Indicates the current edit status; for example, Common edit or Part edit. 3 Indicates the Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern/Master that is currently selected for editing. 4 Indicates the currently editable parameters. 5 Indicates the various displays categorized by function in tab format. Pressing the [F1] – [F6] (Function button) allows you to jump to the display for the corresponding function. 6 Indicates the various displays categorized by the sub function in tab format (when the tab you selected in 5 above has sub functions). Pressing the [SF1] – [SF6] (Sub Function button) allows you to jump to the display for the corresponding sub function. About the Knob icons In the Reference section, the parameters marked by this icon can be changed directly via the appropriate Knob on the panel. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 24 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode Voice Mode Voice Play The Voice mode is used for selecting, playing, and editing desired Voices. This section explains each parameter in the four types (Voice Play, Normal Voice Edit, Drum Voice Edit, and Voice Job). Note that available parameters for editing differ depending on the Voice types (Normal Voice and Drum Voice). [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED Voice Play [F6] EFFECT Voice Play is the main “portal” by which you enter the Voice mode, and it is here where you select and play a Voice. Some of the Voice settings can also be edited in this mode. Arpeggio Edit [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN Operation Press the [VOICE] button. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit [F1] PLAY Common Edit [F1] GENERAL 1 2 3 5 6 7 [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET 4 [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit Voice Play display 1 Voice Bank 2 Voice Number [F1] OSC Indicates the currently selected Voice bank and Voice number. [F3] FILTER 3 Favorite Category indicator When assigning the currently selected Voice to the Favorite category, this indicator will appear. [F2] PITCH [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ 4 Category Indicates the Main category and Sub category of the currently selected Voice. Drum Voice Edit Common Edit 5 TCH (Transmit Channel) [F1] GENERAL Indicates the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel. You can change the Keyboard MIDI transmit channel by pressing the [F2] OUTPUT [TRACK] button so that its indicator lights and pressing any of the Number [1] – [16] buttons. The Keyboard MIDI [F3] EQ transmit channel can be changed also with the following operation: [UTILITY] [F6] MIDI [SF1] CH “KBDTransCh.” 6 (Arpeggio Tempo) [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit Indicates the Arpeggio tempo set for the currently selected Voice. [F1] OSC NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the [F2] PITCH desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” [F3] FILTER 7 OCT (Octave) [F4] AMP Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting. [F6] EQ [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) – [SF6] ARP6 (Arpeggio 6) Voice Job [F1] INIT The Arpeggio types are assigned to the buttons with 8th note icons on the display tab. You can call them up by pressing [F2] RECALL these buttons any time during your keyboard performance. The Arpeggio Type can be set in the Arpeggio Edit display [F3] COPY (page 27). [F4] BULK Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 25 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode [F3] PORTA (Portamento) Voice Play From this display you can select monophonic or polyphonic playback and set the Portamento parameters. The setting [F1] PLAY made here will be applied to the same parameter in Voice Common Edit. [F3] PORTA Mono/Poly [F4] EG Selects monophonic or polyphonic. [F5] ARP ED Settings: mono, poly [F6] EFFECT PortaSW (Portamento Switch) Knob Determines whether Portamento is applied to the current Voice or not. Arpeggio Edit [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN Settings: off, on [F4] LIMIT PortaTime (Portamento Time) Knob Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied. [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Settings: 0 – 127 Common Edit PortaMode (Portamento Mode) Determines how Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance. For details on settings, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: fingered, fulltime [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F4] EG (Envelope Generator) [F6] EFFECT Element Edit In this section, set the offset value for the Amplitude EG and Filter EG of all Elements that make up the Voice. AEG (Amplitude EG) [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH Knob [F3] FILTER ATK (Attack Time) Determines how quickly the sound reaches its maximum level after a key is pressed. [F4] AMP DCY (Decay Time) [F5] LFO Determines how fast the volume falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit SUS (Sustain Level) Determines the sustain level at which the volume will continue while a note is held, after the initial attack and decay. Common Edit [F1] GENERAL REL (Release Time) [F2] OUTPUT Determines how quickly the sound decays to silence after the key is released. [F3] EQ Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 NOTE When a Drum Voice is selected, the Sustain Level and Release Time are not available. “---” appears at each of the corresponding columns and these parameters cannot be edited. [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit FEG (Filter EG) [F1] OSC ATK (Attack Time) [F2] PITCH Determines the speed of filter variation from the time a note is played until the maximum initial level of the Cutoff Frequency is reached. [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP DCY (Decay Time) Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from maximum attack level to the sustain level. Voice Job REL (Release Time) Determines how fast the Cutoff Frequency falls from the sustain level to zero when a note is released. DEPTH [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL Knob Determines the range over which the cutoff frequency of the Filter EG changes. CUTOF (Cutoff) [F6] EQ [F4] BULK Knob Determines the Cutoff Frequency for the Filter. When the Low Pass Filter is selected, for example, the larger the value the brighter the decay. RESO (Resonance) [F3] COPY Supplementary Information Knob Determines the emphasis given to the Cutoff Frequency. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 26 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F5] ARP ED (Arpeggio Edit) FILE Voice Mode Voice Play Indicates the Arpeggio Edit display (page 27) in the Voice mode. [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F6] EFFECT [F5] ARP ED Indicates the EFFECT display (page 35) of Voice Common Edit. [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F2] TYPE Arpeggio Edit [F3] MAIN Sets the Arpeggio-related parameters. Press the [SF1] ARP1 – [SF6] ARP6 in the each display to select the Arpeggio for [F4] LIMIT editing. [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Operation [VOICE] Voice selection [F5] ARP ED Voice mode ARP [EDIT] Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F2] TYPE [F4] CTL SET Bank (Arpeggio Bank) Category (Arpeggio Category) SubCategory (Arpeggio Sub Category) Type (Arpeggio Type) Determines the desired Arpeggio Type number from the specified Bank and Category. Settings: Bank ........................................ pre (preset), user Category/SubCategory ........... See the Category List (page 11). Type......................................... See the “Data List” PDF document. VeloRateOfs (Velocity Rate Offset) Determines the offset value for the Velocity Rate of Arpeggio playback. If the resultant velocity value is less than zero it will be set to 1, and if the resultant velocity is greater than 128 it will be set to 127. [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit Common Edit Settings: -100% – +0% – +100% [F1] GENERAL GateRateOfs (Gate Time Rate Offset) Determines the offset value for the Gate Time Rate of Arpeggio playback. The Gate Time cannot be decreased beyond [F2] OUTPUT its normal minimum of 1; any values outside that range will automatically be limited to the minimum. [F3] EQ Settings: -100% – +0% – +100% [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit [F3] MAIN [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH Tempo (Arpeggio Tempo) Knob Determines the Arpeggio Tempo. Settings: 5 – 300 NOTE If you are using this instrument with an external sequencer, DAW software, or MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it with that device, set the “MIDI Sync” parameter (page 149) in the MIDI display of the Utility mode to “external” or “auto.” When “MIDI Sync” is set to “auto” (only when MIDI clock is transmitted continuously) or “external,” the Tempo parameter here indicates “external” and cannot be changed. NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” Switch (Arpeggio Switch) Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off. [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F6] EQ Voice Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information Settings: off, on Hold (Arpeggio Hold) Determines whether the Arpeggio continues cycling after the keys are released. For details on settings, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: sync-off, off, on MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 27 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET ChgTiming (Change Timing) Determines the actual timing at which the Arpeggio type is switched when you select another type during Arpeggio playback. When set to “realtime,” the Arpeggio type is switched immediately. When set to “measure,” the Arpeggio type is switched at the top of the next measure. Settings: realtime, measure FILE Voice Mode Voice Play [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA [F4] EG KeyMode Determines how the Arpeggio plays back when playing the keyboard. For details on settings, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: sort, thru, direct, sortdirect, thrudirect NOTE Some Arpeggio types belonging to the “Cntr” Category may not have note events (page 16). When such an Arpeggio type is selected and “KeyMode” is set to “sort” or “thru,” no sound is produced, even if the MOX6/MOX8 receives Note On messages. VelMode (Velocity Mode) Adjusts the velocity of the Arpeggio notes. Settings: original, thru [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit OutOctShift (Output Octave Shift) Shifts the pitch of the Arpeggio up or down in octaves. Settings: -10 – +0 – +10 Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F4] LIMIT [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT NoteLimit (Arpeggio Note Limit) Determines the lowest and highest notes in the Arpeggio's note range. Settings: C -2 – G8 Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH VelocityLimit (Arpeggio Velocity Limit) Determines the lowest and highest velocity which can trigger Arpeggio playback. Settings: 1 – 127 [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ [F5] PLAY FX (Play Effect) Drum Voice Edit Common Edit Swing [F1] GENERAL Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. [F2] OUTPUT Settings: -120 – +0 – +120 [F3] EQ UnitMultiply Knob Adjusts the Arpeggio playback time based on tempo. Settings: 50%, 66%, 75%, 100%, 133%, 150%, 200% QtzValue (Quantize Value) Determines to which beats the note data in the Arpeggio will be aligned, or to which beats in the Arpeggio swing is [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH applied. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution of quarter notes in clocks. [F3] FILTER Settings: 2 60 (32nd note), 63 80 (16th note triplet), 6 120 (16th note), 83 160 (8th note triplet), 8 240 (8th note), 43 320 (1/4 note [F4] AMP triplet), 4 480 (1/4 note) QtzStrength (Quantize Strength) [F6] EQ Voice Job Sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats. [F1] INIT Settings: 0% – 100% [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY VelocityRate Determines how much the velocity of Arpeggio playback is offset from the original value. Settings: 0% – 200% GateTimeRate [F4] BULK Supplementary Information Knob Determines how much the Gate Time (length) of the Arpeggio notes is offset from the original value. Settings: 0% – 200% MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 28 VOICE PERF OctaveRange SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Knob Specifies the maximum Arpeggio range in octaves. Settings: -3 – +0 – +3 FILE Voice Mode Voice Play [F1] PLAY Loop [F3] PORTA Determines whether the Arpeggio plays through a single time or continuously, while notes are held. [F4] EG Settings: off, on TriggerMode When this is set to “gate,” pressing the note starts Arpeggio playback and releasing the note stops it. When this is set to [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit “toggle,” pressing the note starts/stops Arpeggio playback and releasing the note does not affect Arpeggio playback. [F2] TYPE Settings: gate, toggle [F3] MAIN AccntVelTh (Accent Velocity Threshold) [F4] LIMIT Determines the minimum velocity that will trigger the Accent Phrase. Settings: off, 1 – 127 AccntStrtQtz (Accent Start Quantize) [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Common Edit Determines the start timing of the Accent Phrase when the Velocity specified in Accent Velocity Threshold above is [F1] GENERAL received. When this is set to off, the Accent Phrase starts as soon as the Velocity is received. When this is set to on, the [F2] OUTPUT Accent Phrase starts on the beat specified for each Arpeggio type after the Velocity is received. [F3] EQ Settings: off, on [F4] CTL SET RandomSFX [F5] LFO Determines whether Random SFX is active or not. [F6] EFFECT Settings: off, on SFXVelOffset (Random SFX Velocity Offset) Element Edit [F1] OSC Determines the offset value by which the Random SFX notes will be shifted from their original velocities. [F2] PITCH Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP SFXKeyOnCtrl (Random SFX Key on Control) When this is set to “on,” a special Random SFX sound is played at a pre-programmed velocity. When this is set to “off,” the Random SFX sound is played at the velocity generated by the playing of each note. Settings: off, on [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F6] EQ Voice Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 29 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Normal Voice Edit A Normal Voice, which contains pitched musical instrument-type sounds that can be played over the range of the FILE Voice Mode Voice Play keyboard, can consist of up to eight Elements. There are two types of Normal Voice Edit displays: those for Common [F1] PLAY Edit to edit the settings common to all Elements, and those for Element Edit to edit individual Elements. This section [F3] PORTA explains the parameters for Common Edit and Element Edit. [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED Common Edit [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit Operation [VOICE] Normal Voice selection [EDIT] [COMMON] [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F1] GENERAL [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit [SF1] NAME Common Edit [F1] GENERAL Name (Voice Name) Enters the desired name for the Voice. If you press the [SF6] CHAR when the cursor is located at “Name,” the name dialog will be displayed. Voice names can contain up to 20 characters. You can set the name by using the [DATA] dial [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ and Cursor [<]/[>] buttons while holding the [SF6] CHAR button. For detailed instructions on naming, see the “Basic [F4] CTL SET Operation” section of the Owner’s Manual. [F5] LFO MainCtgry (Main Category) SubCtgry (Sub Category) [F6] EFFECT Element Edit Determines the Main Category and Sub Category of the Voice. The categories are keywords representing the general [F1] OSC characteristics of the Voices. Selecting the appropriate category makes it easy to find the desired Voice from the huge [F2] PITCH variety of Voices available. There are 17 Main Categories which indicate types of instruments. There are up to six Sub [F3] FILTER Categories for each Main Category, indicating more detailed types of instruments. Settings: See the “Voice Category List” on page 53. [SF2] PLY MODE (Play Mode) [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit Mono/Poly Selects monophonic or polyphonic. For details on settings, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: mono, poly Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ KeyAsgnMode (Key Assign Mode) [F4] CTL SET Determines the playing method when the same notes are received continuously over the same channel, and without [F6] EFFECT corresponding note off messages. For details on settings, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: single, multi Key Edit [F1] OSC NoteShift [F2] PITCH Determines the transpose setting for the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch is raised or lowered. [F3] FILTER Settings: -24 – +0 – +24 [F4] AMP M. TuningNo. (Micro Tuning Number) [F6] EQ Determines the tuning system for the Voice. For information on the various tuning systems, see the “Synthesizer Voice Job Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F1] INIT Settings: 01 (Equal Temp), 02 (PureMaj), 03 (PureMin), 04 (Werckmeist), 05 (Kirnberger), 06 (Vallot&Yng), 07 (1/4 Shift), 08 (1/4 Tone), 09 [F2] RECALL (1/8 Tone), 10 (Indian), 11 (Arabic 1), 12 (Arabic 2), 13 (Arabic 3) [F3] COPY M. TuningRoot (Micro Tuning Root) Determines the root note for the Micro Tuning function. [F4] BULK Supplementary Information Settings: C – B MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 30 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF3] PORTA (Portamento) FILE Voice Mode Voice Play Switch (Portamento Switch) Determines whether or not Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance using the current Voice. [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA Settings: off, on [F4] EG Time (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time or rate when Portamento is applied. [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Settings: 0 – 127 Arpeggio Edit Mode (Portamento Mode) [F2] TYPE Determines how Portamento is applied to your keyboard performance. Settings: fingered, fulltime [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT TimeMode (Portamento Time Mode) Determines how the pitch changes in time. Settings: rate1, time1, rate2, time2 [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Common Edit LegatoSlope (Portamento Legato Slope) [F1] GENERAL Determines the speed of the attack of legato notes, when Portamento Switch above is set to on and “Mono/Poly” is set [F2] OUTPUT to “mono.” (Legato notes “overlap” each other, the next being played before the previous is released.) [F3] EQ Settings: 0 – 7 [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [SF4] OTHER [F6] EFFECT A.Func1 (Assignable Function 1 Mode) A.Func2 (Assignable Function 2 Mode) Determines whether the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1] and [2] buttons function as latch (hold) type or momentary type. For details on settings, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: momentary, latch [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP PB Upper (Pitch Bend Range Upper) PB Lower (Pitch Bend Range Lower) Determines the maximum Pitch Bend Range in semitones. Settings: -48 – +0 – +24 Assign1 (Assign 1 Value) Assign2 (Assign 2 Value) Element Edit [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit Common Edit Knob [F1] GENERAL Knob [F2] OUTPUT Determines the offset value by which the functions assigned to the Assign 1/2 will be shifted from their original settings. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET NOTE The functions assigned to the ASSIGN 1/2 Knobs can be set in the CTL SET display (page 32). [F6] EFFECT Key Edit [F1] OSC [F2] OUTPUT [F2] PITCH Volume [F3] FILTER Knob Determines the output level of the selected Voice. [F4] AMP Settings: 0 – 127 [F6] EQ Pan Voice Job Knob Determines the stereo pan position of the selected Voice. [F1] INIT Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) [F2] RECALL ChoSend (Chorus Send) RevSend (Reverb Send) Knob Knob Determines the Send level of the signal sent from Insertion Effect A/B (or the bypassed signal) to the Chorus/Reverb [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information effect. Settings: 0 – 127 NOTE For details about effect connections, see page 19. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 31 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F3] EQ FILE Voice Mode Voice Play This is a parametric EQ featuring three bands (High, Mid and Low). You can attenuate or boost the level of each [F1] PLAY frequency band (High, Mid, Low) to change the Voice sound. [F3] PORTA FREQ (Frequency) [F4] EG Determines the frequency for each frequency band. [F5] ARP ED Settings: Low: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz [F6] EFFECT Mid: 139.7Hz – 10.1kHz High: 503.8Hz – 14.0kHz Arpeggio Edit [F2] TYPE GAIN [F3] MAIN Determines the level gain for the Frequency (set above), or the amount the selected frequency band is attenuated or boosted. Settings: -12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Q Common Edit Determines the Q (bandwidth) for the Mid band. Settings: 0.7 – 10.3 [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET (Controller Set) [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [SF1] SET1/2 – [SF3] SET5/6 [F6] EFFECT Element Edit Since up to six Controller Sets can be assigned to each Voice, three pages (Sets 1/2, Sets 3/4 and Sets 5/6) are [F1] OSC available. For details on Controller Set, see page 53. [F2] PITCH ElmSw (Element Switch) [F3] FILTER Selects whether the controller will affect each individual Element or not. [F4] AMP Settings: Elements 1 to 8 enabled (“1” to “8”) or disabled (“-”). [F5] LFO NOTE This parameter is disabled when the Dest (Destination) described below is set to a parameter unrelated to the Voice Elements. [F6] EQ Source Determines which controller is to be assigned to and used for the selected Controller Set. This controller then is used to Drum Voice Edit Common Edit control the parameter set in Destination below. [F1] GENERAL Settings: PB (Pitch Bend wheel), MW (Modulation wheel), AT (Aftertouch), FC1/FC2 (Foot controller 1/2), FS (Foot Switch), RB (Ribbon [F2] OUTPUT Controller), BC (Breath controller), AS1 (ASSIGN 1), AS2 (ASSIGN 2), FC2 (Foot Controller 2), AF1 (ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1]), AF2 (ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [2]) NOTE When the foot switch is set to a Control Change number of 96 or higher in the CTL ASN display of the Utility mode, the foot switch will not be available as a “Source” of the Controller Set for the selected Voice. Dest (Destination) [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit Determines the function that is controlled by the controller set in “Source.” [F1] OSC Settings: See the “Control List” in the “Data List” PDF document. [F2] PITCH Depth Determines the degree to which the Source controller affects the Destination. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F6] EQ Voice Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 32 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) FILE Voice Mode Voice Play [SF1] WAVE [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA Wave [F4] EG Selects the LFO waveform. [F5] ARP ED Settings: tri, tri+, sawup, sawdwn, squ1/4, squ1/3, squ, squ2/3, squ3/4, trpzd, S/H 1, S/H 2, user [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit Speed Adjusts the speed (frequency) of LFO variation. [F2] TYPE Settings: 0 – 63 [F3] MAIN TempoSync Determines whether or not the LFO is synchronized to the tempo of the Arpeggio or sequencer (Song or Pattern). Settings: off (not synchronized), on (synchronized) [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Common Edit TempoSpeed This parameter is available only when “TempoSync” above has been set to “on.” It allows you to make detailed note value settings that determine how the LFO pulses in sync with the Arpeggio. Settings: 16th, 8th/3 (eighth-note triplets), 16th. (dotted sixteenth notes), 8th, 4th/3 (quarter-note triplets), 8th. (dotted eighth notes), 4th (quarter notes), 2nd/3 (half-note triplets), 4th. (dotted quarter notes), 2nd (half notes), whole/3 (whole-note triplets), 2nd. (dotted half notes), 4th x 4 (quarter-note quadruplets; four quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 5 (quarter-note quintuplets; five quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 6 (quarter-note sextuplets; six quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 7 (quarter-note septuplets; seven quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 8 (quarter-note octuplets; eight quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 16 (sixteen quarter-notes to the beat), 4th x 32 (32 quarter notes to the beat), 4th x 64 (64 quarter notes to the beat) NOTE The actual length of the note depends on the internal or external MIDI tempo setting. [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC PlayMode [F2] PITCH Determines whether the LFO cycles repeatedly (loop) or only once (one shot). [F3] FILTER Settings: loop, one shot [F4] AMP KeyOnReset [F5] LFO Determines whether or not the LFO is reset each time a note is pressed. [F6] EQ Settings: off, each-on, 1st-on RandomSpeed Determines the degree to which the LFO speed changes at random. Settings: 0 – 127 Drum Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [SF2] DELAY Delay Determines the delay time between the moment you press a key on the keyboard and the moment the LFO comes into [F4] CTL SET [F6] EFFECT Key Edit effect. [F1] OSC Settings: 0 – 127 [F2] PITCH FadeIn (Fade In Time) Determines the amount of time for the LFO effect to fade in (after the ”Delay” time has elapsed). Settings: 0 – 127 [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F6] EQ Voice Job Hold Determines the length of time during which the LFO is held at its maximum level. Settings: 0 – 127 [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY FadeOut (Fade Out Time) Determines the time over which the LFO effect is faded out (after the “Hold” time has elapsed). [F4] BULK Supplementary Information Settings: 0 – 127 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 33 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF3] PHASE FILE Voice Mode Voice Play Phase Determines the starting phase point for the LFO Wave when it is reset. Settings: 0, 90, 120, 180, 240, 270 [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA [F4] EG OFFSET EL1 – EL8 Determines the offset values of the “Phase” parameter (above) for the respective Elements. Settings: +0, +90, +120, +180, +240, +270 [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [SF4] BOX [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN From this display you can select the destination parameter for the LFO (in other words, which aspect of the sound the LFO controls), the Elements to be affected by the LFO, and the LFO Depth. The available three pages (boxes) for setting the destination let you assign multiple destinations. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit ElmSw (LFO Element Switch) Common Edit Determines whether or not each Element is to be affected by the LFO. [F1] GENERAL Dest (Control Destination) [F2] OUTPUT Determines the functions which will be controlled by the LFO Wave. [F3] EQ Settings: See the “Control List” in the “Data List” PDF document. [F4] CTL SET NOTE Regarding “Insertion Effect A Parameter 1 - 16,” “Insertion Effect B Parameter 1 - 16” and “Insertion Effect L Parameter 1 - 32” [F5] LFO described in the Control List, the actual parameter names of the selected Effect type are shown on the display. If one of these names is shown, no function is assigned to that parameter. [F6] EFFECT Element Edit Depth Set the LFO Wave Depth (amplitude). Settings: 0 – 127 [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER DPTRATIO (Depth Ratio) EL1 – EL8 Determines the offset values of the “Depth” parameter (above) for the respective Elements. Settings: 0 – 127 [SF5] USER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit Common Edit This menu is available only when the ”Wave” parameter is set to “user.” You can create a custom LFO wave consisting of [F1] GENERAL up to sixteen steps. [F2] OUTPUT Template [F3] EQ This includes pre-programmed settings for creating an original LFO. You can set the wave randomly by pressing the [F4] CTL SET [SF1] RANDOM button. [F6] EFFECT Settings: all-64.................. Values of all steps are set to -64. all0 ..................... Values of all steps are set to 0. all+64................. Values of all steps are set to +63. sawup ................ Creates a saw shaped upward wave. sawdown ........... Creates a saw shaped downward wave evnstep.............. Values of all even steps are set to -64, and values of all odd steps are set to +63. oddstep ............. Values of all odd steps are set to -64, and values of all even steps are set to +63. Slope Determines the slope or ramp characteristics of the LFO wave. Settings: off (no slope), up, down, up&down Key Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F6] EQ Voice Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL Value (Step Value) Determines the level for each step set in the “Step” parameter. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information Step Numerator: Selects the desired step. Settings: 1 – 16 Denominator: Determines the maximum number of steps. Settings: 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, 12, 16 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 34 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode [F6] EFFECT Voice Play [F1] PLAY [SF1] CONNECT [F3] PORTA [F4] EG 23 4 6 78 9 ) [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit 1 [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN 23 5 ! @ # $ 1 EL: OUT 1 – 8 (Element Out 1 – 8) Determines which Insertion Effect (A or B) is used to process each individual Element. The “THRU” setting lets you [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Common Edit bypass the Insertion Effects for the specified element. When the “InsEF Connect” (Insertion Effect Connection) is set to [F1] GENERAL “vocoder,” the output is specified even if “EL: OUT” is set to either “INSA” or “INSB.” [F2] OUTPUT Settings: THRU, INSA (Insertion Effect A), INSB (Insertion Effect B) [F3] EQ 2 InsA Ctgry (Insertion Effect A Category)/InsB Ctgry (Insertion Effect B Category) 3 InsA Type (Insertion Effect A Type)/InsB Type (Insertion Effect B Type) [F4] CTL SET Determines the category and type for the Insertion Effect A/B. When the “InsEF Connect” is set to “vocoder,” this [F6] EFFECT parameter indicates the “Vocoder Type” and determines the Effect type for the Vocoder. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F5] LFO Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH 4 InsEF Connect (Insertion Effect Connection) Determines the effect routing for Insertion Effects A and B. The setting changes are shown on the diagram in the display, giving you a clear picture of how the signal is routed. For details, see the section “Effect connection in each mode” of [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP the “Basic Structure” (page 19). [F5] LFO Settings: parallel, insA>B, insB>A, vocoder [F6] EQ NOTE When “vocoder” is selected, “VOCODER” is shown in the tab menu of the [SF2] and the tab menu of [SF3] disappears. NOTE When “vocoder” is selected, the audio signal will be output from this instrument in mono. Drum Voice Edit Common Edit NOTE For detailed instructions on using the Vocoder, see the Owner’s Manual. [F1] GENERAL 5 Reverb Send [F2] OUTPUT Adjusts the Reverb send level. [F3] EQ Settings: 0 – 127 [F4] CTL SET 6 Chorus Send [F6] EFFECT Adjusts the Chorus send level. Settings: 0 – 127 7 Chorus Ctg (Chorus Effect Category) 8 Chorus Typ (Chorus Effect Type) Key Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER Determines the Chorus Effect category and type. [F4] AMP Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for details on the description [F6] EQ for each Effect type, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Voice Job 9 Chorus to Reverb [F1] INIT Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect. [F2] RECALL Settings: 0 – 127 [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 35 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode ) Reverb Type Selects the Reverb Effect type. Voice Play Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA ! Chorus Return [F4] EG Determines the return level of the Chorus effect. [F5] ARP ED Settings: 0 – 127 [F6] EFFECT @ Chorus Pan Arpeggio Edit Determines the pan position of the Chorus effect sound. [F2] TYPE Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) [F3] MAIN # Reverb Return [F4] LIMIT Determines the return level of the Reverb effect. [F5] PLAY FX Settings: 0 – 127 Normal Voice Edit Common Edit $ Reverb Pan Determines the pan position of the Reverb effect sound. [F1] GENERAL Settings: L663 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [SF2] INS A (Insertion Effect A) [SF3] INS B (Insertion Effect B) [SF4] CHORUS [SF5] REVERB [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC From these displays, you can set the Effect related parameters when the “InsEF Connect” (Insertion Effect Connection) [F2] PITCH in the CONNECT display is set to “parallel,” “insA>B,” or “insB>A.” These displays consist of multiple pages and can be [F3] FILTER selected by pressing the Cursor [<]/[>] buttons. From these displays, you can also set each parameter of the selected Effect type individually and manually. 1 Category 2 Type Determines the category and type for the selected effect. [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Drum Voice Edit 1 2 3 4 Common Edit [F1] GENERAL Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and [F2] OUTPUT types, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. NOTE “Category” indication is not shown in the REVERB [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET or [F6] EFFECT display. Key Edit 3 Preset [F1] OSC Allows you to call up pre-programmed settings for each [F2] PITCH Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and situations. You can change how the 4 [F3] FILTER sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed [F4] AMP settings. [F6] EQ NOTE For a list of all Preset Performances, see the “Data List” Voice Job PDF document. [F1] INIT 4 Effect Parameters or [F2] RECALL The Effect parameter differs depending on the currently [F3] COPY selected effect type. For information on the editable [F4] BULK Effect parameters in each Effect type, see the “Data Supplementary Information List” PDF document. Also, for details on the description for the each Effect parameter, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 4 36 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode [SF2] VOCODER This display is called up via the [SF2] is available only when the “InsEF Connect” is set to “vocoder” in the [SF1] CONNECT display. The Vocoder-related parameters in this display determine the way in which the Vocoder is applied. Voice Play [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA NOTE For more details about the Vocoder function, see page 21. [F4] EG HPF [F5] ARP ED Band 10 [F6] EFFECT Band 9 Arpeggio Edit Band 2 Microphone Input [F2] TYPE Band 1 Noise Gate Noise Input (*1) BPF1’ (*2) Inst Input (Keyboard Performance) [F3] MAIN Extracting the tonal characteristics [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Level detection Normal Voice Edit + Wet + BPF1 Volume control + Output Dry BPF1 Gain *1 The noise generated in the Vocoder unit is used. *2 The cutoff frequency of the BPF1’ may not be same as the one of the BPF1. This depends on the settings of Formant Shift and Formant Offset. Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Type Determines whether or not the Vocoder is applied to the current Voice. When set to “Thru,” the Vocoder is not applied to the Voice. Settings: Thru, Vocoder Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER Attack (Vocoder Attack Time) Determines the attack time of the Vocoder sound. Settings: 1ms – 200ms [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Release (Vocoder Release Time) Determines the release time of the Vocoder sound. Settings: 10ms – 3000ms Drum Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL MicGateTh (Mic Gate Threshold) [F2] OUTPUT Determines the threshold level of the noise gate for the microphone sound. [F3] EQ Settings: -72dB – -30dB [F4] CTL SET GateSw (Gate Switch) [F6] EFFECT Determines whether or not the microphone sound will be output at the level set in the “HPFOutLvl” parameter when you Key Edit release the notes. Normally, you should set this to “on.” [F1] OSC Settings: off, on [F2] PITCH off: The microphone sound always will be output. on: The microphone sound will be output only while a note is pressed the note. [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP HPF (High Pass Filter) Determines the HPF cutoff frequency for the microphone input sound. Setting this to higher values emphasizes the higher frequency consonant and sibilant sounds (which make words easier to understand). Settings: thru, 500Hz – 16.0kHz [F6] EQ Voice Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL HPFOutLvl (High Pass Filter Output Level) Determines the level of the microphone sound that is output from the HPF (High Pass Filter). Settings: 0 – 127 [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Supplementary Information FormantShift Determines the amount (in BPF) by which the cutoff frequency value of the BPFs (for the Inst Input) is shifted. This parameter can be used to adjust the pitch of the Vocoder sound. Settings: -2, -1, +0, +1, +2 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 37 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Voice Mode FormantOffset Finely adjusts the cutoff frequencies of all BPFs (for the Inst Input). This parameter can be used to fine-tune the pitch of the Vocoder sound. Settings: -63 – +0 – +63 Voice Play [F1] PLAY [F3] PORTA MicLvl (Mic Level) Determines the level of the microphone sound which is to be input to the Vocoder. Settings: 0 – 127 [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT InstInpLvl (Inst Input Level) Arpeggio Edit Determines the level of the keyboard performance sound which is to be input to the Vocoder. [F2] TYPE Settings: 0 – 127 [F3] MAIN NoisInpLvl (Noise Input Level) [F4] LIMIT Determines the level of the noise sound which is input to the Vocoder. This can be used to emphasize sibilant and plosive sounds, and make speech-like characteristics more pronounced. Settings: 0 – 127 [F5] PLAY FX Normal Voice Edit Common Edit OutLvl (Output Level) [F1] GENERAL Determines the output level of the Vocoder. [F2] OUTPUT Settings: 0 – 127 [F3] EQ Dry/Wet (Dry/Wet Balance) [F4] CTL SET Determines the balance between the dry sound (no effect applied) and the wet sound (effect applied). [F5] LFO Settings: D63>W – D=W – DB, insB>A insA>B..................................... Signals processed with Insertion Effect A will be sent to Insertion Effect B and signals processed with Insertion Effect B are sent to Reverb and Chorus. insB>A..................................... Signals processed with Insertion Effect B will be sent to Insertion Effect A and signals processed with Insertion Effect A are sent to Reverb and Chorus. FILE Performance Mode Performance Play [F1] PLAY [F2] VOICE [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [SF3] INS A (Insertion Effect A) [SF4] INS B (Insertion Effect B) These displays consist of multiple pages and can be selected by pressing the Cursor [<]/[>] buttons. From these displays, you can also set each parameter of the selected Effect type individually and manually. [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN Category Type Determines the category and type for the selected effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for details on the description for each Effect type, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit Preset This lets you call up pre-programmed settings for each Effect type, designed to be used for specific applications and [F1] GENERAL situations. You can change how the sound is affected by the selected pre-programmed settings. [F2] OUT/MFX NOTE For a list of all Preset Effect Types, see the “Data List” PDF document. [F3] MEQ Effect Parameters [F4] USB I/O The effect parameter differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For details on the editable Effect [F5] A/D IN parameters in each Effect type, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for detailed descriptions for each Effect [F6] EFFECT parameter, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F6] EFFECT [SF1] CONNECT The Insertion connection type depends on the setting of the Voice assigned to the selected Part. This display sets the System Effect applied to all parts. Chorus Ctg (Chorus Category) Chorus Type Reverb Type Determines the category and type for the Chorus effect and Reverb effect. Settings: For details on the editable Effect categories and types, see the “Data List” PDF document. Also, for detailed descriptions for each Effect type, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Chorus Return Reverb Return Determines the Return level of the Chorus/Reverb Effect. Settings: 0 – 127 [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information Chorus Pan Reverb Pan Determines the pan position of the Chorus/Reverb effect sound. Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) Chorus To Reverb Determines the Send level of the signal sent from the Chorus Effect to the Reverb Effect. Settings: 0 – 127 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 63 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF2] INS SW (Insertion Effect Switch) The Insertion Effects can be applied to up to three Parts. This display lets you set to which Parts the Insertion Effects are FILE Performance Mode Performance Play [F1] PLAY applied. [F2] VOICE [SF4] CHORUS [SF5] REVERB [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED The number of parameters and values available differs depending on the currently selected effect type. For information on parameters, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON Part Edit Operation [F2] TYPE [PERFORM] Performance selection [EDIT] Part selection [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F1] VOICE [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit [SF1] VOICE PartSw (Part Switch) [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX Determines whether each Part is on or off. [F3] MEQ Settings: off, on [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN Bank Determines the Voice Bank (page 7) for each Part. [F6] EFFECT Part Edit Number Determines the Voice Program number for each Part. [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT P.WithVce (Parameter with Voice) [F3] EQ Determines whether or not the following parameter settings of the selected Voice are copied from the Voice to the [F4] TONE current Part when you change a Voice for the current Part individually. • Arpeggio settings • Filter Cutoff Frequency [F5] RCV SW Performance Job • Filter Resonance [F1] INIT • Amplitude EG [F2] RECALL • Filter EG [F3] COPY • Pitch Bend Range (Upper/Lower) • Note Shift NOTE Regardless of the “P.WithVce” setting, the following settings are always copied when a Normal Voice is selected: “Mono/Poly,” “Switch” (Portamento Part Switch), “Time” (Portamento Time) and “Mode” (Portamento Mode). Settings: off (not copied), on (copied) [SF2] MODE Mono/Poly Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for each Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, and polyphonic is for [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information playing multiple simultaneous notes. Settings: mono, poly NOTE This parameter is not available for the Part to which the Drum Voice is assigned. SplitLo/Up (Split Lower/Upper) Determines which area of the keyboard will produce the sound. When “upper” is selected, only notes at the Split Point (Common parameter) and higher will produce sound. When “lower” is selected, only notes lower than the Split Point will produce sound. When “both” is selected, all the notes across the entire keyboard will produce sound. Actually, sound is produced by playing the notes within the area that matches both the settings here and the Note Limit setting. Settings: both, lower, upper MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 64 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Performance Mode ArpPlyOnly (Arpeggio Play Only) Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of the Arpeggio playback. When this parameter is set to on, only the note events of the Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Settings: off, on Performance Play [F1] PLAY [F2] VOICE [SF3] LIMIT [F3] PORTA [F4] EG NoteLimitH (Note Limit High) NoteLimitL (Note Limit Low) [F5] ARP ED Determines the lowest and highest notes of the keyboard range for each Part. Each Part will only sound for notes played [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit within its specified range. Settings: C -2 – G8 [F1] COMMON NOTE If you specify the highest note first and the lowest note second, for example “C5 to C4,” then the note range covered will be “C2 to C4” and “C5 to G8.” [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN VelLimitH (Velocity Limit High) VelLimitL (Velocity Limit Low) [F4] LIMIT Determines the minimum and maximum values of the velocity range within which each Part will respond. Each Part will only sound for notes played within its specified velocity range. [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Settings: 1 – 127 NOTE If you specify the maximum value first and the minimum value second, for example “93 to 34,” then the velocity range covered will be “1 to 34” and “93 to 127.” Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) [F3] MEQ Determines the Portamento parameters for each Part. Portamento is used to create a smooth transition in pitch from the [F4] USB I/O first note played on the keyboard to the next. [F5] A/D IN Switch (Portamento Part Switch) [F6] EFFECT Part Edit Determines whether Portamento is applied to each Part or not. Settings: off, on [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT Time (Portamento Time) Determines the pitch transition time. Higher values result in a longer pitch change time, or a slow speed. [F3] EQ Settings: 0 – 127 [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mode (Portamento Mode) Performance Job Determines the Portamento mode. [F1] INIT Settings: full, fingr full ............................................ Portamento is always applied. fingr (fingered)......................... Portamento is only applied when you play legato (playing the next note before releasing the previous one). NOTE These Portamento parameters above are not available for the Part to which the Drum Voice is assigned. [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record [SF5] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) [F1] SETUP VelSensDpt (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) [F2] REC TR Determines the degree to which the resulting volume of the tone generator responds to your playing strength. The [F3] OTHER higher the value, the more the volume changes in response to your playing strength (as shown below). [F5] CLICK Settings: 0 – 127 When Offset (below) is set to 64: Depth = 127 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) [F6] INFO Supplementary Information Depth = 64 Depth = 32 0 Depth = 0 127 Velocity with which you play a note MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 65 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Performance Mode VelSensOfs (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) Determines the amount by which played velocities are adjusted for the actual resulting velocity effect. This lets you raise or lower all velocities by the same amount—allowing you to automatically compensate for playing too strongly or too softly. Performance Play [F1] PLAY [F2] VOICE Settings: 0 – 127 When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset =32 When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset =96 127 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note When Depth (above) = 64 and Offset =64 127 Actual resulting velocity (affecting the tone generator) 0 64 127 Velocity with which you play a note [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [SF6] OTHER [F5] PLAY FX PB Upper (Pitch Bend Range Upper) PB Lower (Pitch Bend Range Lower) Determines the maximum pitch bend range for each Part in semitones. This is the same as in Voice Common Edit. See [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit page 31. [F1] GENERAL Settings: -48 semi – +0 semi – +24 semi [F2] OUT/MFX Assign 1 (Assign 1 Value) Assign 2 (Assign 2 Value) Knob [F3] MEQ Knob [F4] USB I/O Determines the offset value by which the functions assigned to the ASSIGN 1/2 knobs will be shifted from their original settings. The ASSIGN 1/2 knobs’ functions are set in the CTL SET display (page 32) of Voice Common Edit. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [SF1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan) [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Volume Determines the volume for each part, allowing you to set the optimum level balance of all the Parts. Settings: 0 – 127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position for each Part. Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record VoiceELPan (Voice Element Pan) [F1] SETUP Determines whether the individual pan settings for each Voice (made via [VOICE] [EDIT] Element selection [F4] [F2] REC TR AMP [SF1] LVL/PAN Pan) are applied or not. When this is set to “off,” the pan position for the each Element is set to center in the Part. Settings: off, on [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO [SF2] EF SEND (Effect Send) Supplementary Information From this display you can set the Send Level and Dry Level sent to the System Effects for each Part. For details about the effect connection in the Performance mode, see page 20. ChoSend (Chorus Send) Determines the volume for each Part. This lets you make detailed balance adjustments among the various sounds of the Drum Voice. Settings: 0 – 127 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 66 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Performance Mode RevSend (Reverb Send) Set the stereo pan position for each Part. This lets you make detailed Reverb effect adjustments among the various sounds of the Drum Voice. Performance Play [F1] PLAY Settings: 0 – 127 [F2] VOICE DryLevel Determines the level of the unprocessed (dry) sound of the selected Part, letting you control the overall effect balance among the Parts. [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED Settings: 0 – 127 [F6] EFFECT InsEF (Insertion Effect Part Switch) Determines the Parts available for the Insertion Effect. When this switch is set to on, the Insertion Effect of the Voice Arpeggio Edit assigned to the Part is enabled. [F1] COMMON Settings: off, on [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F3] EQ (Equalizer) [F5] PLAY FX From this display you can adjust the EQ settings for each Part. This is a parametric EQ featuring three bands (High, Mid and Low). You can attenuate or boost the level of each frequency band (High, Mid, Low) to change the Voice sound. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF6]. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with. • Display showing four Parts Keep in mind that since all the available parameters cannot be simultaneously displayed in the four-Part display, you will need to use the cursor controls to scroll the display in order to see and set the other parameters. • Display showing all parameters for one Part [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN For details about the Effect connection including the EQ in the Performance mode, see page 20. Gain Part Edit 3 + [F6] EFFECT [F1] VOICE 0 [F2] OUTPUT 2 2 2 Frequency [F3] EQ [F4] TONE – 1 3 bands Low 1 Mid 1 High [F5] RCV SW Performance Job [F1] INIT 1 FREQ (Frequency) Determines the frequency for each frequency band. Settings: Low: 50.1Hz – 2.00kHz Mid: 139.7Hz – 10.1kHz High: 503.8Hz – 14.0kHz [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record 2 GAIN [F1] SETUP Determines the level gain for the Frequency (set above), or the amount the selected frequency band is attenuated or [F2] REC TR boosted. [F3] OTHER Settings: -12.00dB – +0.00dB – +12.00dB 3 Q Determines the Q (bandwidth) for the Mid band. [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information Settings: 0.7 – 10.3 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 67 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F4] TONE FILE Performance Mode Performance Play You can set parameters related to the pitch and tone for each Part. This display sets the offset value to the same [F1] PLAY parameters in the Voice mode. [F2] VOICE [SF1] TUNE NoteShift Determines the pitch (key transpose) setting for each Part in semitones. Settings: -24 – +0 – +24 [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit Detune [F1] COMMON Determines the fine tuning for each Part. [F2] TYPE Settings: -12.8Hz – +0.0Hz – +12.7Hz [F3] MAIN [SF2] FILTER This display sets the offset value to the filter settings in Voice Element/Key Edit of each Part. Cutoff Determines the Cutoff Frequency for each Part. If you are using LPF (Low Pass Filter) and HPF (High Pass Filter) combined together, this parameter is available for the LPF. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 Resonance Determines the amount of filter resonance. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 FEGDepth Determines the Filter Envelope Generator depth (amount of Cutoff Frequency) for each Part. This setting is not available [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit for the Drum Voice Parts. [F1] VOICE Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [F2] OUTPUT NOTE For details on Filter structure, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F3] EQ [SF3] FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) From this display you can set the FEG parameters for each Part. This display sets the offset value to the FEG settings in the Voice Element Edit of each Part. These parameters are not available for the Drum Voice Parts. Attack (Attack Time) Decay (Decay Time) Sustain (Sustain Level) Release (Release Time) Determines each parameter of the FEG for each Part. For more details about FEG, see page 42. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 [SF4] AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK From this display you can set the AEG parameters for each Part. This display sets the offset value to the filter settings in Voice Element/Key Edit of each Part. [F6] INFO Supplementary Information Attack (Attack Time) Decay (Decay Time) Sustain (Sustain Level) Release (Release Time) Determines each parameter of the AEG for each Part. For more details about AEG, see page 44. The “Sustain” and “Release” parameters are not available for the Drum Voice Parts. Settings: -64 – +0 – +63 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 68 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F5] RCV SW (Receive Switch) FILE Performance Mode Performance Play From this display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and [F1] PLAY Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” the corresponding Part responds to the [F2] VOICE appropriate MIDI data. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF6] button. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel [F3] PORTA most comfortable with. [F4] EG • Display showing four Parts [F5] ARP ED This display type shows the Receive Switch status for four Parts at a time. Set the desired Part on or off, for the corresponding MIDI data type. • Display showing all parameters for one Part NOTE The “Sus” (Sustain) parameter is not available for the Drum Voice Parts. [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON NOTE If “Control Change” here is set to “off,” Control Change related parameters are not available. [F2] TYPE Settings: See below. [F3] MAIN CtrlChange (Control Change) Indicates all Control Change messages. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH PB (Pitch Bend) MIDI messages generated by using the Pitch Bend Wheel. Performance Edit Common Edit MW (Modulation Wheel) [F1] GENERAL MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel. [F2] OUT/MFX RB (Ribbon Controller) MIDI messages for Ribbon Controller. [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN ChAT (Channel After Touch) MIDI messages for Channel After Touch. [F6] EFFECT Part Edit FC1 (Foot Controller 1) FC2 (Foot Controller 2) [F1] VOICE MIDI messages generated by using the optional Foot Controller connected to the rear panel. [F3] EQ Sus (Sustain) [F4] TONE MIDI messages for Control Number 64 (Sustain). This parameter is not available for the Drum Voice Parts. [F2] OUTPUT [F5] RCV SW Performance Job FS (Foot switch) MIDI messages generated by using the optional foot switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack on the rear panel. [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY AS1 (Assign 1) AS2 (Assign 2) MIDI messages generated by using the ASSIGN 1/ASSIGN 2 (Knob 3/Knob4) when the [TONE3] lamp is turned on by pressing Knob Function 1 button. [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR A.Func1 (Assignable Function 1) A.Func2 (Assignable Function 2) MIDI messages generated by using the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1] and [2] buttons. BC (Breath Controller) [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information MIDI messages for Breath Controller. Exp (Expression) MIDI messages for Control Number 11 (Expression). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 69 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Performance Mode Performance Job Performance Job features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required in Performance Play [F1] PLAY the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F2] VOICE Operation [PERFORM] Performance selection [JOB] [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [F1] INIT (Initialize) [F6] EFFECT Resets (initializes) all Performance parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on—very useful when creating a completely new Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE Performance from scratch. [F3] MAIN Parameter Type to be initialized [F4] LIMIT All: All data in the Performance [F5] PLAY FX Common: Data in Common Edit [F6] OUT CH Part 1 – 4: Data of the Part Edit parameters of the corresponding internal Part A/D: Data related to the A/D input part Performance Edit NOTE In order to select “Common,” “Part,” or “A/D,” the “ALL” box must be unchecked. Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [F2] RECALL [F3] MEQ If you are editing a Performance and select a different Performance without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve [F4] USB I/O made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Voice with your latest edits intact. [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F3] COPY [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] PART This convenient operation lets you copy Common Edit and [F3] EQ 1 2 Part Edit settings of a certain Performance to the currently [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Performance Job edited Performance. This is useful if you are creating a Performance and wish to use some parameter settings of [F1] INIT another Performance. [F2] RECALL NOTE When this display is shown, you can hear the original sound at copy source by pressing the [EDIT] to call up the Compare mode. Pressing the [EDIT] button again will exit from the Compare mode. [F3] COPY 3 [F4] BULK Performance Record 1 Data type of Performance (source) [F1] SETUP Determines the Bank and the Performance number to be copied. When “current” is selected, the current Performance is [F2] REC TR specified as the Source Performance. Accordingly, you can copy the parameter settings from a Part to a different Part of [F3] OTHER the same Performance. Settings: Bank: USR1 – 2, --Performance Number: 001 (A01) – 128 (H16), Current 2 Data type of the source [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information Determines the source data type including the Part number. According to the setting here, the Data type of the destination below will be automatically set to the appropriate item. Settings: common, part1 – 4, A/D 3 Data type of the destination Determines the destination data type including the Part number. According to the setting here, the Data type of the source (2) will be automatically set to the appropriate item. Settings: common, part1 – 4, A/D MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 70 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Performance Mode [SF2] VOICE This convenient operation lets you copy Effect and Master EQ settings of a certain Voice assigned to a certain FILE Performance Play 1 [F1] PLAY Performance to the Common parameters of the currently [F2] VOICE edited Performance. This would come in handy when a [F3] PORTA certain Performance has settings that you want to use in your [F4] EG Performance program. NOTE When this display is shown, you can hear the original sound at the copy source by pressing the [EDIT] to call up the Compare mode. Pressing the [EDIT] button again will exit from the Compare mode. [F5] ARP ED 2 [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON 1 Source Voice [F2] TYPE Determines the Bank and the Voice number to be copied. [F3] MAIN Settings: Bank: PRE1 – 8, USR1 – 3, PDR, UDR, GM, GMDR Voice Number: 001(A01) – 128 (H16) [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX 2 Determines which Effect units are copied This convenient operation lets you copy Effect and Master EQ settings of a certain Voice assigned to a certain Performance to the currently edited Performance. You can select Effect units to be copied from “Rev,” “Cho,” “MEQ,” and “MFX.” NOTE Even when each of the Reverb and Chorus is set to “on,” executing the Job does not copy the Send Level from the Voice to the Performance. If you want to apply the same depth of the Reverb and Chorus as in the Voice mode to the copied Voice, manually set the Reverb Send and Chorus Send in the OUTPUT display (page 66) of the Performance Part Edit to the same value as in Voice Edit. [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected performance to a computer or another MIDI device for data archiving. Press the [ENTER] button to execute Bulk Dump. NOTE In order to execute Bulk Dump, you will need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] [F6] MIDI [SF1] CH “DeviceNo.” [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 71 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Performance Record You can record your keyboard performance in the Performance mode to a Song or Pattern. A part of the Knob FILE Performance Mode Performance Play operations, the Controller operations, and Arpeggio playback as well as your keyboard playing in the Performance [F1] PLAY mode can be recorded to the specified Track as MIDI events. For information on the recorded Knob operations, see the [F2] VOICE “Sequencer Block applied to the Performance mode” (page 11). [F3] PORTA Operation [PERFORM] Performance selection [REC] NOTICE Performance recording overwrites all Tracks of the destination Song or Pattern Section. Please check whether or not the destination Song or Pattern Section contains data before recording. You can check whether or not each Track contains data at the Track status line on the display. Select a Song or Pattern Section containing no data as the destination or save all Song/ Pattern data to an external USB flash memory device before recording. [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F1] SETUP SeqMode (Sequencer Mode) Determines to which destination (Song or Pattern) your Performance playing will be recorded. Settings: song, pattern Number (Song/Pattern Number) Determines the Pattern or Song number as the destination for recording. [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [F3] MEQ Section Determines the Section as the destination for recording when the Sequencer Mode is set to “pattern.” Keep in mind that the data recorded to the selected destination Section will be overwritten and erased as soon as recording starts. [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Section Length Specifies the length of the Section when the Sequencer Mode is set to “pattern.” Settings: 001 – 256 Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT Time Signature (Meter) Determines the time signature. Settings: 1/16 – 16/16, 1/8 – 16/8, 1/4 – 8/4 [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Tempo Determines the tempo for recording. While recording, the Arpeggio is played back at the tempo set here. Settings: 5 – 300 NOTE If you are using this instrument with an external sequencer, DAW software, or MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it with that device, set the “MIDI Sync” parameter in the Utility MIDI display (page 149) to “external” or “auto.” When “MIDI Sync” is set to “auto” (only when MIDI clock is transmitted continuously) or “external,” the Tempo parameter here indicates “external” and cannot be changed. NOTE This setting is copied to the tempo for the record destination (a Song/Pattern). NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) – [SF6] ARP6 (Arpeggio 6) The Arpeggio types are assigned to the buttons with 8th note icons on the display tab. You can call them up by pressing these buttons any time during your keyboard performance. Selects the Arpeggio setting before recording. The Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO Supplementary Information Arpeggio Type can be set in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 58). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 72 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Performance Mode [F2] REC TR (Record Track) Performance Play [F1] PLAY 1 2 [F2] VOICE [F3] PORTA [F4] EG [F5] ARP ED [F6] EFFECT 3 1 RecTrack (Record Track) Determines the Tracks of the Song/Pattern as the destination for recording. Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN 2 PERFPART (Performance Part) Indicates the Tracks of the Song/Pattern as the destination for recording according to the “RecTrack” setting. 3 Track Status Indicates whether each Track of the selected Song or Pattern Section contains MIDI data or not. Solid-lined squares indicate that the Track contains MIDI data, while the dotted-lined squares indicate that the Track contains no data. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F3] OTHER KeyOnStart (Key On Start Switch) [F2] OUT/MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O When set to on, recording starts immediately when you press any note on the keyboard. [F5] A/D IN Settings: off, on [F6] EFFECT CopyPerfParam (Copy Performance Parameters) Part Edit Determines whether or not the Performance parameter settings are copied to the Mixing of the destination Song or [F1] VOICE Pattern. [F2] OUTPUT Settings: off, on [F3] EQ MoveToRecMode (Move To Record Mode) [F4] TONE If this is set to “on,” operation moves to the destination mode for recording after Performance recording. If it is set to “off,” operation moves to the Performance Play display. Settings: off, on [F5] RCV SW Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F5] CLICK [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Pressing the [F5] CLICK button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR [F6] INFO (Information) [F3] OTHER Indicates the Song/Pattern number, Section (only when the Sequencer Mode is set to “pattern”), and the Song/Pattern [F5] CLICK name which is set as the destination for the Performance recording. Also, this indicates the space left on the Sequencer [F6] INFO memory. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual Supplementary Information 73 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Performance Mode Supplementary Information Performance Play [F1] PLAY Performance Category List This is the list of the Main Categories and their Sub Categories to which the respective Performances of the MOX6/ [F3] PORTA MOX8 belong. Main Category (abbreviation) Rock / Pops (Rock) [F4] EG Sub Category (abbreviation) [F5] ARP ED Top40 Classic Rock (Clsic) Hard Rock (Hard) Folk Ballad (Balad) Film R&B / Hip Hop (R&B) Hip Hop (HipHp) Modern R&B (Modrn) Classic R&B (Clsic) Funk Electronic (Elect) Techno (Tekno) Trance (Trnce) Dance Pop / House (House) Breakbeats / D&B (D&B) Chillout / Ambient (Chill) Jazz Swing Modern Jazz (Modrn) Smooth Jazz (Smoth) Jazz Funk (JzFnk) Club Jazz (Club) World Latin Reggae / Dancehall (Regae) Ethnic / World (Ethno) Piano Organ Synth Symphonic (Symph) Strings (String) Woodwind (WWind) Brass Guitar (Guitr) Bass Chromatic Percussion (Cperc) Splits & Layers (SpLyr) Country (Cntry) Blues [F6] EFFECT Arpeggio Edit Sequence (Seq) [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Performance Edit Pad FX [F2] VOICE Hard Soft Sound Effect (S.EFX) Common Edit [F1] GENERAL Functions of Knobs 1 – 8 [F2] OUT/MFX This section explains the functions assigned to Knobs 1 – 8 in the Performance mode. In the Performance mode, [F3] MEQ operating Knobs 1 – 8 in Common Edit applies to the Common Edit parameters. Meanwhile, operating Knobs 1 – 8 in [F4] USB I/O Part Edit applies the Part Edit parameters. For instructions, see the Owner's Manual. [F5] A/D IN When the [TONE 1] lamp is turned on: [F6] EFFECT Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4 CUTOFF RESONANCE FEG DEPTH PORTAMENTO Part Edit Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG FEG ”CUTOF” page 56 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF2] FILTER “Cutoff” of the selected part page 68 Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG FEG ”RESO” page 56 [F3] EQ Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF2] FILTER “Resonance” of the selected part page 68 [F4] TONE Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG FEG ”DEPTH” page 56 [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F5] RCV SW Performance Job Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF2] FILTER “FEGDepth” of the selected part page 68 Common Edit [PERFORM] [F3] PORTA “PortaTime” page 56 [F2] RECALL Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F1] VOICE [SF4] PORTA “Time” of the selected part page 65 [F3] COPY [F1] INIT [F4] BULK When the [TONE 2] lamp is turned on: Knob 1 Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4 ATTACK DECAY SUSTAIN RELEASE Performance Record Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG AEG “ATK” page 56 [F1] SETUP Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Attack” of the selected part page 68 [F2] REC TR Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG AEG ”DCY” page 56 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Decay” of the selected part page 68 [F3] OTHER [F6] INFO Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG AEG “SUS” page 56 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Sustain” of the selected part page 68 Common Edit [PERFORM] [F4] EG AEG “REL” page 56 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Release” of the selected part page 68 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual [F5] CLICK Supplementary Information 74 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY Knob 2 Knob 3 Knob 4 VOLUME PAN ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 Knob 6 Knob 7 Knob 8 LOW MID F MID HIGH [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F2] OUT/MFX [SF1] OUT “Volume” page 60 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] VOL/PAN “Volume” of the selected part page 66 Common Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F2] OUT/MFX [SF1] OUT ”Pan” page 60 [F3] PORTA Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] VOL/PAN “Pan” of the selected part page 66 [F4] EG Common Edit Disabled Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F1] VOICE [SF6] OTHER “Assign1” of the selected part Common Edit Disabled Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F1] VOICE [SF6] OTHER “Assign2” of the selected part [F1] PLAY CHO PRESET Knob 6 CHO SEND [F6] EFFECT page 66 Knob 7 REV PRESET Knob 8 REV SEND [F4] LIMIT page 59 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F3] EQ “LOW GAIN” of the selected part page 67 Common Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F1] GENERAL [SF3] EQ OFS ”MID FREQ” page 59 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F3] EQ “MID FREQ” of the selected part page 67 Common Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F1] GENERAL [SF3] EQ OFS ”MID GAIN” page 59 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F3] EQ “MID GAIN” of the selected part page 67 Common Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F1] GENERAL [SF3] EQ OFS ”HIGH GAIN” page 59 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F3] EQ “HIGH GAIN” of the selected part page 67 Knob 6 Knob 7 Knob 8 GATE TIME OCT RANGE UNITMULTIPLY [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUT/MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE page 64 [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F2] OUT/MFX [SF1] OUT “ChoSend” page 60 [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F2] OUTPUT [SF2] EF SEND “ChoSend” of the selected part page 66 [PERFORM] [F6] EFFECT [SF5] REVERB “Preset” page 64 Common Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F2] OUT/MFX [SF1] OUT “RevSend” page 60 Part Edit [PERFORM] [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] button [F2] OUTPUT [SF2] EF SEND “RevSend” of the selected part page 67 [F5] RCV SW Performance Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Performance Record [F1] SETUP [F2] REC TR Common Edit [PERFORM] ARP [EDIT] [F1] COMMON “GateTimeRate” page 57 Part Edit [PERFORM] ARP [EDIT] [F5] PLY FX ”GateTimeRate” page 58 Common Edit Disabled Part Edit [PERFORM] ARP [EDIT] [F5] PLY FX ”OctaveRange” [F3] OTHER [F5] CLICK [F6] INFO page 58 Common Edit Disabled Part Edit [PERFORM] ARP [EDIT] [F5] PLY FX ”UnitMultiply” page 58 [PERFORM] ARP [EDIT] [F1] COMMON “Tempo” page 57 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual Performance Edit Common Edit [PERFORM] [F6] EFFECT [SF4] CHORUS “Preset” TEMPO [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH When the [ARP] lamp is turned on: Knob 5 [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [PERFORM] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F1] GENERAL [SF3] EQ OFS ”LOW GAIN” Part Edit Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON page 66 Common Edit Common Edit [F2] VOICE [F5] ARP ED When the [EFFECT] lamp is turned on: Knob 5 Performance Play Common Edit When the [EQ] lamp is turned on: Knob 5 FILE Performance Mode When the [TONE 3] lamp is turned on: Knob 1 QUICK SET Supplementary Information 75 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode Song Mode Song Play The Song mode lets you record, edit and play your own original Songs. This section explains each parameter in four types (Song Play, Song Record, Song Edit, and Song Job). [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK Song Play [F6] CHAIN Song Play is the main “portal” by which you enter the Song mode, and it is here where you select and play a Song. Song Record Song Record Standby Operation [F1] SETUP Press the [SONG] button. [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F1] PLAY [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording 1 2 [F1] SETUP [F3] REST 3 4 5 [F4] TIE 8 [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL 6 7 9 Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON Song Play display NOTE From the PLAY display in the Song Play mode, you can select the Voice of the Mixing Part corresponding to the current Track by [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button. [F4] LIMIT 1 Loc1 (Location 1), Loc2 (Location 2) The Song Play mode has a convenient Location function that lets you jump to user-specified parts of a Song. This lets you assign a specific measure number in the selected Song, and instantly jump to the assigned measure—either during playback or when the Song is stopped. Two locations can be assigned. This display indicates the locations. For detailed instructions, see page 97. [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT 2 Sequencer Edit indicator When changing the MIDI data and value of the parameters related sequencer (with the exception of the Mixing [F4] TR SEL settings), the Sequencer Edit indicator will appear on the top right corner of the display. In Song/Pattern mode, the edit [F5] INSERT buffer for the sequencer settings is the memory location for the entire programs of both modes. Therefore, if you change [F6] DELETE the sequencer settings for one Song or one Pattern, the Sequencer Edit indicator is always shown in the Song/Pattern mode (with the exception of the Mixing mode) before storing. NOTE Since the edit buffer for the Mixing settings is different from that for the sequencer settings, the Sequencer Edit Indicator is not [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE shown in the Mixing mode. [F3] EVENT 3 Track Status Indicates whether each Track contains MIDI data or not. Solid-lined squares ( data, while the dotted-lined squares ( Song Job ) indicate that the Track contains MIDI ) indicate that the Track contains no data. [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG 4 Song number/ Song name Determines the Song to be played back. Supplementary Information Settings: Song number 01 – 64 5 Trans (Transpose) Determines the key transpose setting for the entire Song, and can be adjusted in semitones. Settings: -36 – +0 – +36 6 Meter Determines the meter (time signature) of the Song. The specified meter is applied to the measure specified in the “MEAS” (8) parameter. Settings: 1/16 – 16/16, 1/8 – 16/8, 1/4 – 8/4 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 76 VOICE 7 PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode (Tempo) Determines the Song playback tempo. Song Play Settings: 5.0 – 300.0 NOTE If you are using this instrument with an external sequencer, DAW software, or MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it with that device, set the “MIDI Sync” parameter in the Utility MIDI display (page 149) to “external” or “auto.” When “MIDI Sync” is set to “auto” (only when MIDI clock is transmitted continuously) or “external,” the Tempo parameter here indicates “external” and cannot be changed. NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” Song Record Standby 8 MEAS (Measure) Determines the location at which playback starts. This also indicates the current location of playback. [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE 9 SCN1 (Scene 1) – [SF6] SCN6 (Scene 6) [F3] ARP ED You can assign the settings of the Song-related parameters (Song Scene) and the Arpeggio-related parameters to these buttons. You can also recall the settings by pressing these buttons. For detailed instructions on registering Scenes, see the “Assigning various settings related to Song playback (Song Scene)” on page 97. For detailed instructions on setting [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording the Arpeggio-related parameters, see page 82. NOTE Pressing the [SF1] SCN1 – [SF6] SCN6 during playback changes only the Song Scene. [F1] SETUP NOTE After registering the Song Scene, the 8th note icon will appear on the tab corresponding to the pressed button. You can confirm [F3] REST whether the Arpeggio Type is assigned to that button in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 82) of the Song mode. [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL [F2] GROOVE (Grid Groove) Arpeggio Edit The Grid Groove function makes it possible to adjust the pitch, timing, length, and velocity of notes in a specified Track via a 1-measure 16th-note grid to create “grooves” with precise sequencer-like programming, which would not otherwise be possible. The Grid Groove function affects Song playback without actually changing the sequence data. [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT – 0 + NOTE OFST (Note Offset) CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) GATE OFFSET (Gate Time Offset) VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO NOTE OFST (Note Offset) Raises or lowers the pitch of the note(s) on the selected grid in semitones. Settings: -99 – +00 – +99 [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS CLOCK SFT (Clock Shift) Shifts the timing of the note(s) on the selected grid forward or backward in clock increments. Settings: -120 – +000 – +120 [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information GATE OFFSET (Gate Time Offset) Lengthens or shortens the note(s) on the selected grid in clock increments. Settings: -120 – +000 – +120 VELO OFST (Velocity Offset) Increases or decreases the velocity of the note(s) on the selected grid. Settings: -127 – +000 – +127 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 77 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F3] TRACK FILE Song Mode Song Play [SF1] CHANNEL [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE From this display you can set the MIDI output channel for each of the sixteen Tracks of the corresponding internal/ [F3] TRACK external tone generator. You can also simultaneously set multiple Tracks (Tracks 1 – 8 or Tracks 9 – 16) to the same [F6] CHAIN value as the currently selected Track, by changing the parameter while holding the [SF4] 1 – 8 button or [SF5] 9 – 16 button. Song Record Song Record Standby OUT CH (Output Channel) [F1] SETUP Determines the MIDI transmit channel of the sequence data for each Track. Tracks set to “Off” will not sound. [F2] VOICE Settings: 1 – 16, off [F3] ARP ED NOTE In the Song/Pattern mode, MIDI messages created by playing the keyboard/knobs/wheels is sent to the tone generator block or [F5] CLICK the external MIDI instruments via the MIDI output channel of the currently selected Track. [F6] ALL TR [SF2] OUT SW (Output Switch) During Song Recording [F1] SETUP You can also simultaneously set multiple Tracks (Tracks 1 – 8 or Tracks 9 – 16) to the same value as the currently selected Track, by changing the parameter while holding the [SF4] 1 – 8 button or [SF5] 9 – 16 button. INT SW (Internal Switch) Determines whether playback data is transmitted to the internal tone generator block or not. Settings: off, on [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit EXT SW (External Switch) [F1] COMMON Determines whether playback data is output to the external MIDI tone generator via MIDI or not. [F2] TYPE Settings: off, on [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [SF3] TR LOOP (Track Loop) From this display you can determine whether the data in the selected Track loops or not in playback. Using Loop can be an effective way to repeat short patterns and phrases throughout the Song. For details, see page 99. Settings: off, on [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL [F6] CHAIN This function allows Songs to be “chained” together for automatic sequential playback. For details, see page 98. skip.................. Skips past (ignores) the selected chain number and continues playback from the next chain number. [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job stop ................. Stops Song chain playback at the selected chain number. You can restart the Song chain playback from the next chain number by pressing the [R] (Play) button. [F1] UNDO/REDO end .................. Indicates the end mark of the Song chain data. [F3] EVENT [F2] NOTE [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 78 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Song Recording FILE Song Mode Song Play Song Record Standby mode Operation [SONG] Song selection [REC] [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record [F1] SETUP Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP Type [F2] VOICE Determines the Recording Type. The Recording Type can be divided into two groups: Realtime recording and Step [F3] ARP ED recording. With Realtime recording, the instrument functions in the same way as a tape recorder, recording the [F5] CLICK performance data as it is played. This allows you to capture all the nuances of an actual performance. In Realtime recording, the “Type” should be set to “replace,” “overdub,” or “punch.” With Step recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, step recording method—similar to writing [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording music notation onto paper. In Step recording, the “Type” should be set to “step.” [F1] SETUP Settings: When the RecTrack is set to any of 1-16: replace, overdub, punch, step [F3] REST When the RecTrack is set to tempo: replace, punch, step When the RecTrack is set to scene: replace, punch When the RecTrack is set to multi: replace, overdub, punch replace .............. You can use this method when you want to overwrite an already recorded Track with new data in real time. The original data will be erased. overdub ............. You can use this method when you want to add more data to a Track that already contains data. Previously recorded data will be maintained. punch ................ You can use this method when you want to overwrite data to a specified range of a Track that already contains data. It allows you to overwrite the already recorded data from the starting point to the ending point (measure/ beat) that was specified before recording. step.................... Use this method to enter notes manually one at a time. NOTE When “punch” is selected, “Punch-in measure: beat” and “Punch-out measure : beat” appear in the display and should be set. If you’ve set the Locate 1 and 2 points (Loc1, Loc2), the punch-in/out points can be set with a single button press. Move the cursor to the punch-in/out value, and notice that a ”COPYLOC” menu item appears. Press the [SF1] COPYLOC button, and the punch-in/out settings are automatically assigned to the existing Locate points. Quantize (Resolution) This parameter is available when the Recording Type is set to something other than “step.” Record quantize aligns the [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT timing of notes automatically, as you record. You can set this parameter also by using the Note Type selection window [F4] TR SEL called up via the [SF6] button. [F5] INSERT Settings: off, 2 60 (32nd note), 63 80 (16th note triplet), 6 120 (16th note), 83 160 (8th note triplet), 8 240 (8th note), 43 320 (1/4 [F6] DELETE note triplet), 4 480 (1/4 note) Song Job Event [F1] UNDO/REDO This parameter is available when the Recording Type is set to “step.” This lets you specify the event type to be entered. [F2] NOTE Settings: note, p.bend (pitch bend), CC#000 – #119 (Control Change) [F3] EVENT RecTrack (Recording Track) [F4] MEAS Determines the Track to be recorded. Pressing the [SF6] button lets you switch between Single Track recording and All [F5] TRACK Track recording. [F6] SONG Settings: tempo, scene, 1 – 16, all Supplementary Information (Tempo) Determines the Song tempo. Settings: 005.0 – 300.0 NOTE If you are using this instrument with an external sequencer, DAW software, or MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it with that device, set the “MIDI Sync” parameter in the Utility MIDI display (page 149) to “external” or “auto.” When “MIDI Sync” is set to “auto” (only when MIDI clock is transmitted continuously) or “external,” the Tempo parameter here indicates “external” and cannot be changed. NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started. You can set this parameter also by using the window for inputting a number directly called up via the [SF6] NUM button. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 79 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F2] VOICE FILE Song Mode Song Play In this display you can set the Voice-related parameters for the recording Track. The settings here affect the Part for [F1] PLAY which the receive channel (set in the Mixing mode) matches the transmit (output) channel of the recording Track. [F2] GROOVE Voice [F3] TRACK Determines the voice used in the recording Track. When the cursor is located here, you can select a voice by using the [F6] CHAIN bank, group, number buttons and the Category Search function. Volume Determines the volume of the recording Track. Settings: 0 – 127 Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the recording Track. Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording InsEF (Insertion Effect Part Switch) Determines whether the Insertion effects are applied to the recording Track or not. Settings: off, on (Tempo) Determines the Song tempo. This parameter is same as the tempo setting in the [F1] SETUP display. Settings: 005.0 – 300.0 NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Song recording will be started. [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F3] ARP ED (Arpeggio Edit) [F6] OUT CH Song Edit Indicates the Arpeggio Edit display (page 82) of the Song mode. [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] CLICK Pressing the [F5] CLICK button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. NOTE In the CLICK display (page 144), you can make various settings for the metronome click, such as the note resolution, volume, and lead-in count for recording. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F6] ALL TR (All Track) [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS Pressing the [F6] lets you switch between Single Track recording and All Track recording. [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 80 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode During Song Recording Song Play Operation [SONG] Song selection [REC] [R] (Play) [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE In Realtime recording, the editable parameters during recording are in the [F1] SETUP display, [F2] VOICE display, and [F3] ARP ED display of the Song recording standby mode. In Step recording, the displays shown during recording are different from the Song recording standby mode. The following parameters can be edited during recording. [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby Pointer indicating the current note position. [F1] SETUP Beat Graph [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] SETUP [F1] COMMON This is the display in which notes are “placed” during step recording. When the meter is 4/4, the display is divided into four beats (one measure). Each diamond-shaped marker in the display represents one 32nd beat (each 1/4 note division is divided into eight 32nd beats). For example, if the following rhythmic pattern “ ” is entered in 4/4 time, a display like the one shown above right will appear. [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Pointer Determines the data-entry position. The triangular pointer above the beat graph indicates the data-entry position. To move the pointer right or left, use the [INC] and [DEC] buttons or the [DATA] dial. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE Value [F2] VIEW FLT When the Event to be entered ([F1] SETUP Event) is set to “note,” this value specifies the velocity with which the note will be entered. Settings: When the Event is set to “note”: 1-127, kbd, rnd1 – rnd4 1 – 127, kbd, rnd1 – rnd4 When the Event is set to “p.bend”: -8192 – +8191 When the Event is set to “CC (Control Change 001 – 119)”: 000 – 127 When the Event is set to “tempo” with RecTrack = tempo: 005 – 300 NOTE You can select “kbd” (keyboard) and “rnd1” – “rnd4” (random1 – 4) as well as the values 1 – 127 when the Event to be entered is set to “note.” When “kbd” is selected, the actual playing strength will be entered as the velocity value. When one of the random settings is selected, a random velocity value will be entered. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT StepTime [F4] MEAS This indicates the “size” of the current recording step time for the next note to be entered, and determines to what [F5] TRACK position the pointer will advance after a note has been entered. You can set this parameter also by using the Note Type [F6] SONG selection window called up via the [SF6] button. Supplementary Information Settings: 0001 – 0059, 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note, half note, whole note GateTime “Gate time” refers to the actual length of time the note sounds. For the same quarter note, for example, a long gate time will produce a slur while a short gate time will produce a staccato effect. This allows you to produce slurs, staccato notes, etc. Gate time is indicated as a percent value of the step time. Settings: 1% – 200% MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 81 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode [F3] REST Song Play Press [F3] to enter a rest as long as the specified step time. The point will move ahead to the next data-entry position. [F1] PLAY Rests do not appear on the display. [F2] GROOVE NOTE There is no actual data representing rests in the MIDI sequencer. When a “rest” is entered the pointer simply moves ahead to the next data-entry position, effectively leaving a rest. [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record [F4] TIE Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP 1 2 [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP When the [F4] button is pressed to enter a tie, the preceding note is lengthened to the full step time. For example, in the phrase above, notes are entered with 1/4 note step time. If the step time is then changed to an 8th note and [F4] is [F3] REST pressed, a note is entered. Dotted notes can also be entered using the TIE function. To produce a dotted 1/4 note, for [F4] TIE example, set the step time to an 8th note, enter a note and then press [F4] twice. [F5] DELETE NOTE This display is available only when the Event to be entered is set to “note.” [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F5] DELETE [F2] TYPE Press this to actually delete the note events at the current cursor position. [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] BAK DEL (Back Delete) Moves the pointer backward by one step and deletes all notes at that location. NOTE Mistakenly entered notes can be erased by pressing [F6] immediately after they are entered (before changing the step time [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT value). [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT Arpeggio Edit This display contains the basic settings for Arpeggio playback, including Type and Tempo. The MOX6/MOX8 has four arpeggiators. In the Song mode, the different Arpeggio types can be assigned to up to four parts, and up to four arpeggio types can be simultaneously played. The parameters are the same as in the Voice mode (page 27) except for the following. [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT Operation [SONG] [REC] [F3] ARP ED Song mode ARP [EDIT] [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information [F1] COMMON Switch Determines whether Arpeggio is on or off for all Parts. This setting is applied to the ARP [ON/OFF] button on the panel. Settings: off, on SyncQtzValue (Sync Quantize Value) Determines the actual timing at which the next Arpeggio playback starts when you trigger it while the Arpeggio of a certain Part is played back. When set to “off,” the next Arpeggio starts as soon as you trigger it. The number shown at right of each value indicates the resolution of the 1/4 note in clocks. Settings: off, 2 60 (32nd note), 63 80 (16th note triplet), 6 120 (16th note), 83 160 (8th note triplet), 8 240 (8th note), 43 320 (1/4 note triplet), 4 480 (1/4 note) MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 82 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET QtzStrength (Quantize Strength) Determines the offset value for “QtzStrength” in the [F5] PLAY FX display. This parameter is applied to all parts. Settings: -100 – +0 – +100 FILE Song Mode Song Play [F1] PLAY VelocityRate [F2] GROOVE Determines the offset value for “VelocityRate” in the [F5] PLAY FX display. This parameter is applied to all parts. [F3] TRACK Settings: -100 – +0 – +100 GateTimeRate Knob Determines the offset value for “QtzTimeRate” in the [F5] PLAY FX display. This parameter is applied to all parts. Settings: -100 – +0 – +100 Swing [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE Determines the offset value for “Swing” in the [F5] PLAY FX display. This parameter is applied to all parts. [F3] ARP ED Settings: -120 – +0 – +120 [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F2] TYPE These are the same as in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 27) of the Voice mode. [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F3] MAIN [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit These are the same as in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 27) of the Voice mode. Please note that the “Tempo” parameter is not in the MAIN display of the Song mode. Instead, the following parameter is available in the display. The tempo setting for arpeggio is same as the tempo setting in the Song Play display. [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN VoiceWithARP (Voice with Arpeggio) Each Arpeggio type is assigned a specific Voice best suited to the type. This parameter determines whether or not the appropriate Voice registered to each Arpeggio type is assigned to the edited Part. When set to “on,” the appropriate Voice is assigned to the edited Part in place of the currently assigned Voice. When set to “off,” the appropriate Voice is not assigned to the edited Part. The currently assigned Voice is maintained. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] LIMIT These are the same as in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 28) of the Voice mode. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job [F5] PLAY FX (Play Effect) [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE These are the same as in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 28) of the Voice mode. [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS [F6] OUT CH (Output Channel) [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG OutputSwitch Supplementary Information When this is set to on, Arpeggio playback data is output via MIDI. Settings: off, on TransmitCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI transmit channel for Arpeggio playback data. When set to “KbdCh,” the Arpeggio playback data is output via the MIDI Keyboard Transmit Channel ([UTILITY] [F6] MIDI “KBDTransCh”). Settings: 1 – 16, KbdCh (Keyboard Channel) MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 83 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode Song Edit This mode gives you comprehensive, detailed controls for editing the MIDI events of individual Song Tracks. MIDI Song Play events are messages (such as note on/off, note number, program change number, etc.) that make up the data of a [F1] PLAY recorded Track. It can be used to correct mistakes as well as add dynamics or effects such as vibrato to refine and [F2] GROOVE finish the Song. [F3] TRACK Operation [SONG] Song selection [EDIT] [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F1] CHANGE Shows the Event List of the selected Song Track. See the Owner’s Manual for instructions. [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR [F2] VIEW FLT (View Filter) The display lets you select the event types that appear on the CHANGE display. For example, if you wish to edit only note events, place a checkmark in the box next to “Note” so that only the note events appear in the CHANGE display During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST (Event List). [F4] TIE Settings: Note, PitchBend, ProgramChange, ControlChange, Ch.AfterTouch, PolyAfterTouch, RPN (Registered Parameter Number), [F5] DELETE NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number), Exclusive [F5] CLR ALL (Clear All) Press the [F5] to remove all checkmarks at once. [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F6] SET ALL Press the [F6] to set checkmarks into all boxes. [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F4] TR SEL (Track Select) [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT You can switch between the display for 1 – 16 Tracks, SCN (Scene) Track, and TMP (Tempo) Track by pressing this button. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE [F5] INSERT Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO When the cursor is located at the desired position in the [F1] CHANGE display (Event List), pressing this button calls up the display for inserting new MIDI events in the Song mode or Pattern mode. The event types which can be inserted to the Song are described below. [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS Note [F5] TRACK These are the events that define notes, making up the largest portion of all performance data. This is the most common and prevalent type of data. [F6] SONG Supplementary Information NOTE (Note name) Determines the note name or the specific keyboard pitch of the note. Settings: C -2 – G8 GATE (Gate time) Determines the length of time that a note actually sounds in beats and clocks. Settings: 000:001 – 999:479 NOTE On this synthesizer, one clock is 1/480th of a quarter note. VELO (Velocity) Determines how strongly the selected note sounds. Settings: 001 – 127 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 84 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode PitchBend These are the events that define continuous changes in pitch and they are generated by Pitch Bend Wheel operation. DATA Song Play [F1] PLAY Determines the Pitch Bend data. Settings: -8192 – +8191 ProgramChange Program change events are used to select Voices. BANK [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby Determines the Voice bank. The voice bank consists of MSB and LSB. Settings: 000 – 127, *** NOTE Bank select MSB and LSB are actually part of the Control Change set of messages (below). However, since they apply specifically to Voice selection, they are grouped and described here. PC NO (Program Change Number) Determines the specific Voice (from the bank selected by MSB and LSB above). Settings: 000 – 127 NOTE For information on the Voice Bank and Voice number, see the “Voice List” in the “Data List” PDF document. [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP Control Change [F3] REST These events control the sound and certain response characteristics of the voice, and are usually generated/recorded [F4] TIE by moving a controller (such as a modulation wheel, knob, slider or foot controller). [F5] DELETE CTRL NO (Control Number) Determines the Control Change number. Settings: 000 – 127 NOTE For information on the functions assigned to the each Control Change number, see the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. DATA See “Data Entry MSB/LSB” in the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: 000 – 127 Ch.AfterTouch (Channel After Touch) This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. NOTE The keyboard of the MOX6/MOX8 does not feature an After Touch function. However, you can insert After Touch events into the [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE Song data from this display. [F2] VIEW FLT DATA [F4] TR SEL This represents the amount of pressure applied to the key. [F5] INSERT Settings: 000 – 127 [F6] DELETE PolyAfterTouch (Polyphonic After Touch) Song Job This event is generated when pressure is applied to a key after the note is played. Unlike the Channel After Touch event, [F1] UNDO/REDO however, individual data is provided for each key. [F2] NOTE NOTE The keyboard of the MOX6/MOX8 does not feature an After Touch function. However, you can insert After Touch events into the [F3] EVENT Song data from this display. NOTE Determines the key to which After Touch is applied. Settings: C -2 – G8 DATA [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information This represents the amount of pressure applied to the key. Settings: 000 – 127 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 85 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET RPN (Registered Parameter Number) These events are used to change the parameter values for each tone generator Part. This event is used to set part settings such as Pitch Bend Sensitivity or Tuning. MSB-LSB See “Registered Parameter Number MSB/LSB” in the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: 000 – 127 DATA (Data Entry MSB-LSB) See “Registered Parameter Number MSB/LSB” in the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. Settings: 000 – 127, *** NOTE Normally three types of control change data are sent: RPN MSB (101), RPN LSB (100), and Data Entry MSB (6). In this synthesizer, Data Entry LSB (38) is added to this and the resulting group of control change events is handled as one in this display. Note that once the RPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same RPN’s value change. When performing a control operation, you should transmit an RPN Null message (7FH, 7FH) after using these messages to prevent operational errors. NRPN (Non Registered Parameter Number) Changes parameter values for each tone generator part. They can be used to edit sounds via MIDI, allowing you to edit filter or EG settings, or adjust the pitch or level for each instrument of a drum voice. MSB-LSB See “Non Registered Parameter Number MSB/LSB” in the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. FILE Song Mode Song Play [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit Settings: 000 – 127 [F1] COMMON DATA (Data Entry MSB-LSB) [F2] TYPE See the “Non Registered Parameter Number MSB/LSB” in the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F3] MAIN Settings: 000 – 127, *** [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX NOTE Normally three types of control change data are sent: NRPN MSB (99), NRPN LSB (98), and Data Entry MSB (6). In this synthesizer, this group of control change events is handled as one in this display. Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN’s value change. When performing a control operation, you should transmit an RPN Null message (7FH, 7FH) after using these messages to prevent operational errors. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE NOTE The MOX6/MOX8 cannot receive NRPN messages. [F2] VIEW FLT Exclusive (System Exclusive) [F4] TR SEL A type of MIDI message used to exchange data unique to a specific model or type of device. Unlike other MIDI events, [F5] INSERT these events differ depending on the manufacturer/device, and are incompatible among different devices. [F6] DELETE DATA (HEX) Song Job See the System Exclusive message in the “MIDI” section of the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. [F1] UNDO/REDO Settings: 00 – 7F, F7 (Data must be entered in hexadecimal format.) [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F6] DELETE Press this to actually delete the note events at the current cursor position. [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 86 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode Song Job The Song Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and data transform functions you can use to change Song Play the sound of the Song. It also includes a variety of convenient operations, such as copying or erasing data. See the [F1] PLAY Owner’s Manual for instructions. [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK NOTICE An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while an “Executing...” message is shown. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data. Operation [SONG] Song selection [JOB] [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F1] UNDO/REDO [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, editing session, or Job, and restores the data to its previous state. This allows you to recover from accidental data loss. Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them. NOTICE Undo/Redo does not work with Mixing Voice operations. [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F2] NOTE (Note data Job) [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit Pressing this calls up the selected Job display. NOTE Before executing the Note data Job, make sure that you specify the Track (01 – 16, all) and range (measure : beat : clock) to which the Job is applied. [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN 01: Quantize [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Quantization is the process of adjusting the timing of note events by moving them closer to the nearest exact beat. You can use this feature, for example, to improve the timing of a performance recorded in real time. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 [F1] CHANGE Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F2] VIEW FLT Quantize (Resolution) [F4] TR SEL Determines to what beats the note data in the specified Track will be aligned. [F5] INSERT Settings: 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note, 16th note + 16th note triplet, 8th note [F6] DELETE + 8th note triplet Song Job Strength [F1] UNDO/REDO This parameter sets the “strength” by which note events are pulled toward the nearest quantize beats. A setting of 100% [F2] NOTE produces exact timing. A setting of 0% results in no quantization. [F3] EVENT Settings: 000% – 100% [F4] MEAS SwingRate [F5] TRACK Delays notes on even-numbered beats (backbeats) to produce a swing feel. For example, if the meter is 4/4 and the [F6] SONG quantize value is quarter notes, the 2nd and 4th beats of the measure will be delayed. When a triplet quantize value is Supplementary Information used, the last note of each triplet is delayed. When the quantize value is even-numbered, beats will be delayed. Settings: The range differs depending on Quantize setting. For details, see below. If the quantize value is 1/4 note, 8th note, 16th note, 32nd note: A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of the specified quantize value. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, with 75% being equivalent to a dotted-note delay. If the quantize value is 1/4 note triplet, 8th note triplet, 16th note triplet: A setting of 100% is equivalent to three times the length of the specified quantize value. A setting of 66% produces exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 67% increase the amount of swing, with 83% being equivalent to a sextuplet delay. If the quantize value is 8th note + 8th note triplet, 16th note + 16th note triplet: A setting of 100% is equivalent to twice the length of a 8th note or 16th note. A setting of 50% produces exact timing and therefore no swing feel. Settings above 51% increase the amount of swing, with 66% being equivalent to a triplet delay. NOTE If a swing value other than 100% results in notes being positioned after other non-swing notes, the latter notes are delayed accordingly. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 87 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode GateTime Determines the gate time (the length of time a note sounds) of the even-numbered backbeat notes to enhance the swing feel. When a triplet quantize value is used, the gate time of the last note of each triplet is adjusted. When the quantize value is 8th note + 8th note triplet or 16th note + 16th note triplet, the gate time of the even-numbered 8th note Song Play [F1] PLAY or 16th note beats will be adjusted. A setting of 100% leaves the original gate time unchanged. If an adjusted gate time [F2] GROOVE value is less than 1, the value is rounded off to 1. [F3] TRACK Settings: 000% – 200% [F6] CHAIN Song Record 02: Modify Velocity Song Record Standby This Job alters the velocity values of the specified range of notes, letting you selectively boost or cut the volume of those [F1] SETUP notes. Velocity changes are calculated as follows: [F2] VOICE Adjusted velocity = (original velocity x Rate) + Offset If the result is 0 or less, the value is set to 1. If the result is higher than 127, the value is set to 127. [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. During Song Recording [F1] SETUP SetAll [F3] REST Sets the velocities of all target notes to the same fixed value (1 to 127). When set to “OFF” the Set All parameter has no [F4] TIE effect. When this is set to a value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Settings: off (0), 001 – 127 Arpeggio Edit Rate [F1] COMMON Determines the percentage by which the target notes will be shifted from their original velocities. Settings below 100% reduce the velocities, and settings above 100% increase the velocities proportionately. A setting of 100 produces no change. When the Set All parameter is not set to “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT Settings: 000% – 200%, *** [F5] PLAY FX Offset Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted velocity values. Settings below 0 reduce the velocities, and settings above 0 increase the velocities. A setting of 0 produces no change. When the Set All parameter is not set to “off,” this parameter [F6] OUT CH Song Edit appears as “***” and cannot be changed. [F1] CHANGE Settings: -127 – +0 – +127, *** [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL 03: Modify Gate Time [F5] INSERT This Job alters the gate times of the specified range of notes. Gate time changes are calculated as follows: Adjusted gate time = (original gate time x Rate) + Offset If the result is 0 or less, the value is rounded off to 1. [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 [F3] EVENT Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F4] MEAS SetAll [F5] TRACK Sets the gate times of all target notes to the same fixed value. When set to “OFF,” the Set All parameter has no effect. [F6] SONG When set to a value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. Supplementary Information Settings: off (0), 0001 – 9999 Rate Determines the percentage by which the gate time of the target notes will be changed. Settings below 100% shorten the notes, and settings above 100% lengthen the notes proportionately. A setting of 100 produces no change. When the Set All parameter is not set to “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Settings: 000% – 200%, *** Offset Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted gate time values. Settings below 0 shorten the gate time, and settings above 0 lengthen the gate time. A setting of 0 produces no change. When the Set All parameter is not set to “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. Settings: -9999 – +0 – +9999, *** MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 88 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET 04: Crescendo This Job lets you create a crescendo or decrescendo over the specified range of notes. (Crescendo is a gradual increase in volume, and decrescendo is a gradual decrease.) FILE Song Mode Song Play [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. VelocityRange Determines the intensity of the crescendo or decrescendo. The velocity values of the notes in the specified range are gradually increased or decreased starting at the first note in the range. The velocity of the last note in the range becomes the original velocity of the note plus the Velocity Range value. If the resultant velocity is outside the 1 – 127 range, it is set to 1 or 127 accordingly. Settings greater than 0 produce a crescendo, and settings less than 0 produce a decrescendo. A setting of 0 produces no effect. Settings: -127 – +0 – +127 NOTE Executing this Job changes velocities of the note on events in the specified range to produce the crescendo/decrescendo. Note that this Job cannot apply the crescendo/decrescendo to long sustained notes having a long gate time. If you wish to do this, use the “Create Continuous Data” Job (page 92) with the Event Type set to “Control Change 11." 05: Transpose [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE Transpose lets you change the key or pitch of the notes in the specified range. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON Note Determines the range of note pitches over which the Job is applied. You can also set the note directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [SF6] KBD button and pressing the desired key. Settings: C -2 – G8 [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Transpose Transposes notes in the specified range (in semitones). A setting of +12 transposes up one octave, while a setting of -12 transposes down an octave. A setting of 0 produces no change. Settings: -127 – +0 – +127 [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT 06: Glide The Glide Job replaces all notes following the first note in the specified range with pitch bend data, producing smooth glides from note to note. This is ideal for producing slide-guitar or string-bending effects. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE GlideTime [F3] EVENT Determines the time of the glide. Higher values produce a longer glide between notes. [F4] MEAS Settings: 000 – 100 [F5] TRACK PBRange (Pitch Bend Range) [F6] SONG Determines the maximum pitch bend range to be applied by the Glide Job (in semitones). Supplementary Information Settings: 01 – 24 NOTE Please note that the Song may not play back properly if you set the “PB Range” to a value different from the one set via the Voice Edit mode. In order that the Song plays back properly, insert the MIDI event below to the corresponding Track in the Song Edit display (page 84). RPN [000-000] xxx (“xxx” represents the Pitch Bend value) 07: Create Roll This Job creates a series of repeated notes (like a drum roll) in the specified range with the specified continuous changes in clock step and velocity. This is ideal for creating fast staccato rolls and special stuttering effects. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 89 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET StartStep (Starting Step) EndStep (Ending Step) Determines the size of the step (i.e., the number of clocks) between each note in the roll. The smaller the value, the finer the roll. Both the starting and ending clock values can be specified, making it easy to create rolls in which the step size FILE Song Mode Song Play [F1] PLAY varies during the roll. [F2] GROOVE Settings: StartStep: 001 – 999, EndStep: 001 – 999 [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Note Determines the specific note (or instrument in Drum voices) for the roll effect. You can also set the note directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [SF6] KBD button and pressing the desired key. Settings: C -2 – G8 Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE StartVelo (Starting Velocity) EndVelo (Ending Velocity) Determines the velocity of the notes in the roll. Both the starting and ending velocity values can be specified, making it easy to create rolls in which the velocity increases or decreases. This lets you create rolls that gradually increase or decrease in volume (crescendo/decrescendo) Settings: StartVelo: 001 – 127, EndVelo: 001 – 127 08: Sort Chord This Job sorts chord events (simultaneous note events) by order of pitch. The sort affects the order of the notes in the event list display (page 84), but does not change the timing of the notes. When used to pre-process chords before using the Separate Chord Job (below), Chord Sort can be used to simulate the “stroke” or strumming sound of guitars and similar instruments. [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 [F2] TYPE Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT Type Determines how the chord note data is sorted. Settings: up, down, up&down, down&up up ...................... The notes are sorted in ascending order. After executing this Job with this setting, execute the Separate Chord Job to create a guitar-like upstroke strum. down.................. The notes are sorted in descending order. After executing this Job with this setting, execute the Separate Chord Job to create a guitar-like downstroke strum. up&down ........... Sorts chord notes on downbeats in ascending order and chord notes on upbeats in descending order, based on the Grid setting (below). down&up ........... Sorts chord notes on downbeats in descending order and chord notes on upbeats in ascending order, based on the Grid setting (below). Grid Determines the type of note that serves as the basis for the Chord Sort Job. Settings: 32nd note, 16th note triplet, 16th note, 8th note triplet, 8th note, 1/4 note triplet, 1/4 note [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE 09: Separate Chord [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS This Job slightly separates notes in chords within the specified range, inserting a specified number of clocks between each note. Use this Job after the Chord Sort Job above, to create guitar-like upstroke or downstroke effects. [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Supplementary Information Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Clock Determines the number of clock cycles inserted between adjacent chord notes. Settings: 000 – 999 NOTE Note that there are 480 clock cycles per quarter note. NOTE It is not possible to separate chords so that they cross into the next chord or they overstep the range (set above). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 90 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode [F3] EVENT (Event Job) Song Play Pressing this calls up the selected Job display. [F1] PLAY NOTE Before executing the Event Job, make sure that you specify the Track and range (measure: beat: clock) to which the Job is [F2] GROOVE applied. Please note that the Track to be specified varies depending on the Job. [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN 01: Shift Clock Song Record This Job shifts all data events in the specified range forward or backward by the specified number of clocks. Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, TMP=tempo, SCN=scene, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is [F2] VOICE applied. [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK Clock Determines the amount by which the data will be delayed or advanced in measures, beats, and clocks. [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording Settings: 000: 0: 000 – 999: 3: 479 [F1] SETUP Direction [F3] REST Determines the direction in which the data will be shifted. Advance moves the data toward the beginning of the sequence, while Delay shifts the data toward the end of the sequence. [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE Settings: Advance, Delay [F6] BAK DEL 02: Copy Event Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON This Job copies all data from a specified source range to a specified destination location. Execute this Job after setting: • Source Track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) [F2] TYPE • Source range (measure : beat : clock) [F3] MAIN • Destination Track (01-16, TMP, SCN, all) [F4] LIMIT • Destination range (measure : beat : clock) [F5] PLAY FX • Top measure of destination [F6] OUT CH • Count (number of times data is to be copied) Song Edit Source Track and range in measures, beats, and clocks NumberOfTimes [F1] CHANGE Determines the number of times the data is copied. [F2] VIEW FLT Settings: x01 – x99 [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT NOTICE When Copy Event is executed, any data already existing at the Destination location will be overwritten. [F6] DELETE Destination Track and the top (measure, beat, and clock) of the destination 03: Erase Event Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE This Job clears all specified events from the specified range, effectively producing a segment of silence. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, TMP, SCN, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG EventType Supplementary Information Determines the event type to be erased. All events are cleared when ALL is selected. Individual control change numbers can be specified when erasing control change events. Settings: When TR is set to 01 – 16: Note (Note events), PC (Program Change), PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive), All (all events) When TR is set to “TMP” (Tempo): TMP (tempo) When TR is set to “SCN” (Scene): SceneMemory (Scene change information), TrackMute (Track mute setting change information) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 91 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode 04: Extract Event This Job moves all instances of specified event data from a specified range of a Track to the same range in a different Song Play [F1] PLAY Track. [F2] GROOVE TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 [F3] TRACK Determines the Track (01 – 16) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F6] CHAIN Song Record EventType Selects the event type to be extracted. Specific note and control change numbers can also be specified as required. Settings: Note, PC (Program Change), PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change), CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive) Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE TR (Track) [F3] ARP ED Determines the destination Track (01 – 16). [F5] CLICK [F6] ALL TR 05: Create Continuous Data During Song Recording [F1] SETUP This Job creates continuous pitch bend or control change data over the specified range. [F3] REST TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 [F4] TIE Determines the Track (01 – 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL EventType Determines the event type to be created. Arpeggio Edit Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), EXC (System Exclusive), TMP (Tempo) [F1] COMMON * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). [F2] TYPE Data (Data Range) [F3] MAIN Determines the lower and upper limits for the data range to be created. [F4] LIMIT Settings: When Event Type is set to PB: -8192 – +0 – +8191 [F5] PLAY FX When Event Type is set to TMP: 005.0 – 300.0 When Event Type is set to other: 0 – 127 [F6] OUT CH Song Edit Clock [F1] CHANGE Determines the number of clocks to be inserted between each created event. Settings: 001 – 999 Curve = +16 Curve = 0 (linear) Curve = -16 [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL Curve [F5] INSERT Determines the “curve” of the continuous data. Refer to the graph for approximate curve shapes. End point Start point [F6] DELETE Song Job Settings: -16 – +0 – +16 [F1] UNDO/REDO NumberOfTimes This distance specified by Clock Determines the number of times the data creation is to be repeated. For example, if data is created in the range M001:1:000 – M003:1:000 and this parameter is set to 03, the same data will be created at M003:1:000 – M005:1:000 [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT and M005:1:000 – M007:1:000. This Job lets you insert repeated volume or filter cutoff variations to create tremolo or [F4] MEAS wah effects. [F5] TRACK Settings: x01 – x99 [F6] SONG Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 92 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode 06: Thin Out This Job thins out the specified type of continuous data in the specified range—allowing you to free up memory space Song Play [F1] PLAY for other data or further recording. [F2] GROOVE TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Song Record EventType Determines the event type to be thinned. Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), TMP (Tempo) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). NOTE The Thin Out Job will not work on continuous data that has a clock interval of greater than 60 clocks per event. Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK 07: Modify Control Data [F6] ALL TR This Job lets you change the values of a specified type of control change data (for example, pitch bend, control change, aftertouch, etc.) in the specified range. Data changes are calculated as follows: Modified value = (original value x Rate) + Offset. Any result lower than the minimum is set to the minimum; any result higher than the maximum is set to the maximum. TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Determines the Track (01 – 16, TMP, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. EventType Determines the event type to be modified. Settings: PB (Pitch Bend), CC (Control Change)*, CAT (Channel Aftertouch), PAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), TMP (Tempo) * You can also specify the CC No. (Control Change number). SetAll Sets all target events to the same fixed value. When set to “off” the Set All parameter has no effect. When set to a value other than “off,” the Rate and Offset parameters are unavailable and appear as “***” on the display. Settings: off, 000 -127 (-8192 – +0 – +8191 for pitch bend, 005.0 – 300.0 for tempo), *** Rate During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE Determines the percentage by which the target events will be shifted from their original values. When the Set All [F2] VIEW FLT parameter is not set to “off,” this parameter appears as “***” and cannot be changed. [F4] TR SEL Settings: 000% – 200%, *** [F5] INSERT Offset Adds a fixed value to the Rate-adjusted event values. When the Set All parameter is not set to “off,” this parameter [F6] DELETE Song Job appears as “***” and cannot be changed. [F1] UNDO/REDO Settings: -127- +0 – +127 (-8192 – +0 – +8191 for pitch bend, -275 – +0 – +275 for tempo), *** [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT 08: Beat Stretch [F4] MEAS This Job performs time-expansion or compression over the selected range. Keep in mind that this operation affects all [F5] TRACK event timing, note step times, and note gate times. [F6] SONG TR (Track) 001 : 1 : 000 – 999 : 4 : 479 Supplementary Information Determines the Track (01 – 16, all) and range of measures/beats/clocks over which the Job is applied. Rate Determines the amount of time expansion or compression as a percentage. Settings higher than 100% produce expansion, and settings below 100% produce compression. A setting of 100 produces no change. Settings: 025% – 400% MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 93 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode [F4] MEAS (Measure Job) Song Play Pressing this calls up the selected Job display. [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE 01: Create Measure [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN This Job creates empty measures at the specified location in all Tracks. Meter (time signature) of measures to be inserted Number of measures to be inserted Song Record Song Record Standby Source data 001 – 004 005 – [F1] SETUP 016 [F2] VOICE 8 measures inserted at measure 5 001 – 004 005 – 012 013 – 024 [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK The inserted 8 measures [F6] ALL TR Insertion point (measure number) During Song Recording Meter of measures to be inserted [F1] SETUP Determines the meter or time signature of the measures to be created. You may find it convenient to use this parameter [F3] REST when you need to create a Song that incorporates meter changes. [F4] TIE Settings: 1/16 – 16/16, 1/8 – 16/8, 1/4 – 8/4 [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Insertion point (Measure number) Arpeggio Edit Determines the insert point (measure number) at which the newly created blank measures will be inserted. [F1] COMMON Settings: 001 – 999 [F2] TYPE Number of measures to be inserted Determines the number of empty measures to be created and inserted. [F3] MAIN Settings: 01 – 99 [F4] LIMIT NOTE When empty measures are inserted, measure and meter data following the insert point are moved forward accordingly. [F5] PLAY FX NOTE If the insert point is set after the last measure containing data, only the meter data at that point is set without actually inserting the measures. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE 02: Delete Measure [F2] VIEW FLT This job deletes the specified measures of the current Song. Measure and meter data following the deleted measures are moved backward accordingly. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Source data 001 – 004 005 – 012 013 – Measures M006 – M012 deleted 001 – 004 005 – 016 024 Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT Delete range Delete range Settings: 001 – 999 [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 94 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode [F5] TRACK (Track Job) Song Play Pressing this calls up the selected Job display. [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE 01: Copy Track [F3] TRACK This Job copies all data of the selected type from a specified source Track to a specified destination Track. Source Song and Track (01 – 16) Destination Song and Track (01 – 16) [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby NOTICE [F1] SETUP The copy operation overwrites any data previously existing on the destination Track. [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED Data type to be copied [F5] CLICK Determines the type(s) of data to be copied. Select the Data type to be copied desired type by check-marking the appropriate box. Settings: Seq Event (all events in the Track), Grid Groove (for the selected Track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters) [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP 02: Exchange Track [F3] REST This Job exchanges or “swaps” the specified type of data Target Tracks for the Exchange operation (01 – 16) [F5] DELETE between two specified Tracks in the current Song. [F6] BAK DEL Data Type to be exchanged Arpeggio Edit Determines the type(s) of data to be exchanged. Select the [F1] COMMON desired type by check-marking the appropriate box. [F2] TYPE Settings: Seq Event (all events in the Track), Grid Groove (for the selected Track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters) [F4] TIE Data Type to be exchanged [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX 03: Mix Track [F6] OUT CH This job mixes all data from two selected Tracks (“A” and “B”), and places the result in Track B. Track A (01 – 16) Song Edit [F1] CHANGE Track B (01 – 16) Track A Track B [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL Mix Track [F5] INSERT Track B [F6] DELETE Song Job Target Tracks for the Mix operation [F1] UNDO/REDO Settings: 01 – 16 [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT 04: Clear Track This Job deletes all data of the selected type from the selected [F4] MEAS Track for which data will be cleared (01 – 16, TMP, SCN, all) [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Pattern Track. Supplementary Information Data type to be cleared Determines the type(s) of data to be cleared. Select the desired type by check-marking the appropriate box. Settings: Seq Event (all events in the Track), Grid Groove (for the selected Track), Mix Part Param (all Mixing Part parameters) MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual Data type to be cleared 95 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode 05: Normalize Play Effect This Job rewrites the data in the selected Track so that it incorporates the current Grid Groove settings. Song Play [F1] PLAY TR (Track) [F2] GROOVE Determines the Song Track to which the Job is applied. [F3] TRACK Settings: 01 – 16, all [F6] CHAIN Song Record 06: Divide Drum Track Song Record Standby Separates the note events in a drum performance assigned to a specified Track, and places the notes corresponding to [F1] SETUP different drum instruments in separate Tracks (Tracks 1 through 8). [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED TR (Track) Determines the Song Track to which the Job is applied. [F5] CLICK Settings: 01 – 16 [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording 07: Put Track To Arp (Put Track to Arpeggio) [F1] SETUP This Job copies data in the specified measures of a Track for creating Arpeggio data. For details, see page 126. [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE 08: Copy Phrase [F6] BAK DEL This Job copies the Phrase (created in the Pattern mode) to a specified track of the current Song. Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON NOTICE This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination track with the exception of the Mixing setup. [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F6] SONG (Song Job) [F5] PLAY FX Pressing this calls up the selected Job display. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit 01: Copy Song This Job copies all data from a selected source Song to a [F1] CHANGE Source Song [F2] VIEW FLT selected destination Song. The Mixing Voices used by the [F4] TR SEL source Song are also copied. [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE NOTICE Song Job This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Song. 02: Split Song To Pattern [F1] UNDO/REDO Destination Song [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT This Job allows you to copy a part of the current Song—all 16 Source Song range (in measures) Tracks over a specific range of measures. [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG NOTICE This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Pattern and Section. 03: Clear Song [F4] MEAS Supplementary Information Destination Pattern and Section This job deletes all data (including the Mixing Voices) from the selected Song or all Songs. It can also be used to delete all 64 Songs at the same time. 04: Song Name This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Song. For detailed instructions on naming, see the “Basic Operation” of the Owner’s Manual. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 96 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Song Mode Supplementary Information Song Play [F1] PLAY Song Playback Types [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK Playback from the middle of the Song [F6] CHAIN To start playback of the Song from midway through the Song, set the desired location by using the controls below, then press the [R] (Play) button. These operations can also be executed during playback. Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP Forward Press the [RR] (Forward) button. Fast forward Hold the [RR] (Forward) button. Rewind Press the [LL] (Rewind) button. [F3] ARP ED Fast Rewind Hold the [LL] (Rewind) button. [F5] CLICK Move to the top of the Song Press the [T] (Top) button. Move to location 1 While holding the [T] (Top) button, press the [LL] (Rewind) button. Move to location 2 While holding the [T] (Top) button, press the [RR] (Forward) button. [F2] VOICE [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST When the Song does not play back properly: [F4] TIE Keep in mind that starting a Song from somewhere in the middle may cause playback problems, such as the wrong sound, incorrect pitch or unexpected volume changes. This may occur because the MIDI events recorded at the start the Song have not been recognized by the tone generator section, since playback has started at a different point in the Song, with different MIDI events. To prevent this from happening, set the “SongEventChase” parameter (page 145) to [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit “PC+PB+Ctrl” or “all” in the OTHER display of the Utility mode. With this setting, the Song will be played back properly [F1] COMMON even when starting playback from the middle of the Song. [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN Assigning specific measure numbers to Locations 1 and 2 To assign specific measure numbers to locations 1 and 2, [F4] LIMIT Location Location 2 2 ロケーション 1 1 ロケーション [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH select the desired measure number then press the [LL]/ [RR] (Rewind/Forward) while holding the [REC/SET Song Edit LOCATE]. The setting here will be shown at the top of the [F1] [F1] CHANGE PLAY display in the Song mode. [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL Assigning various settings related to Song playback (Song Scene) [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE You can assign five different “snapshots” of important Song-related parameters such as transpose, tempo, Track mute status, and the basic Song Mixing setup to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons as Song Scenes. One of the convenient advantages of Song. Scene is that it lets you instantly and automatically execute parameter settings that normally require many button presses or controller operations. Use it during Song recording or playback to make instantaneous Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT setting changes. [F4] MEAS Song Scene parameters Tempo [F5] TRACK Song Mode PLAY display (page 76) Transpose Supplementary Information Play Effect settings for 16 Tracks GROOVE display (page 77) Track Mute settings for 16 Tracks Pan settings for 16 Mixing Parts [F6] SONG [MUTE] (See the “Quick Guide” of the Owner’s Manual) Mixing mode OUTPUT display (page 118) Volume settings for 16 Mixing Parts Reverb Send settings for 16 Mixing Parts Chorus Send settings for 16 Mixing Parts Cutoff Frequency settings for 16 Mixing Parts TONE display (page 118) Resonance settings for 16 Mixing Parts AEG Attack settings for 16 Mixing Parts AEG Release settings for 16 Mixing Parts MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 97 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Registering the Song Scene After making the desired settings for the Scene, simultaneously hold down the [STORE] button and press one of the [SF1] to [SF6] buttons. The 8th note icon is shown in the tab corresponding to the Sub Function button to which the Song Scene is registered. Press the [STORE] button to store the Song data including the Song Scene settings. FILE Song Mode Song Play [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK Recalling the Song Scene You can recall the Song Scene by pressing one of the [SF1] to [SF6] buttons in the PLAY display or other displays which show the “SCN” indication at the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. [F6] CHAIN Song Record Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE Song Chain Playback [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK Song Chain Playback allows you to put together a play list of preset Songs in any desired order, and have them automatically play back in sequence. You can set the order of Song playback then start the Chain Playback from the Song Chain display. [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP 1 Calls up the Song Chain display (page 78). [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON Press the [F6] CHAIN in the Song Play display. 2 Press the [R] (Play) button to start the Song Chain playback. [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN The Songs are played back according to the order of the Chain. When an empty Song is assigned to the Chain [F4] LIMIT number, one measure of silence is counted, followed by playback of the next Song. When a “skip” is assigned to the [F5] PLAY FX Chain number, the assigned Song will be ignored or skipped then the next Song will start. When a “stop” is assigned to the Chain number, playback will be stopped at the corresponding Song. Press the [R] (Play) to restart playback from the next Chain number. If an “end” is assigned to the Chain number, playback will stop at the end of the Song. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT 3 If you wish to stop playback in the middle of a Song Chain, press the [J] (Stop) button. NOTE The Song Chain can only be played back in the Song Chain display, and not from any other display. [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 98 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Song Track Loop – setting example In the example below, a 40-measure Song has been recorded and Track 1 is set to play back normally over the 40 measures. Track 2 has been set to loop, and will repeat until the [J] (Stop) is pressed. When set to on, you can specify the range to be looped. (Only the end point can be set; the start point of looped playback is fixed to the beginning of the Song.) Playback FILE Song Mode Song Play [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F6] CHAIN Track 1 (40 measures of data) Song Record Song Record Standby Track 2 (40 measures of data) [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE The four-measure data is repeated ten times [F5] CLICK NOTICE Please be careful to note that changing the Track Loop from off to on will delete the data of the area that is not looped. 1 [F3] ARP ED Press the [F1] PLAY button to call up the Song Play display. Set the last measure of looped playback as desired here. [F6] ALL TR During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Arpeggio Edit In this example, the last measure is set to “004.” 2 [F1] COMMON [F2] TYPE Press the [F3] TRACK button and then press the [SF3] TR LOOP button to call up the Track Loop display, and move the cursor to the desired Track. [F3] MAIN [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT 3 4 Set Track Loop to on by using the [INC] button or the [DATA] dial. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) [F4] TR SEL [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Press the [INC] button. The Loop is set to on and the part that is not looped is deleted. Song Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] MEAS [F5] TRACK If you want to restore the deleted data and return the selected Track to off, press the [SF6] UNDO button. NOTICE [F6] SONG Supplementary Information The Undo function can only be used on the last Track Loop operation. If you’ve set other Tracks to loop, the original data of those previously edited Tracks cannot be recovered. NOTICE If you move to another display, the Undo function cannot be executed. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 99 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Punch In/Out (Type = punch) FILE Song Mode You can use this method when you want to re-record only over a specific area of the Track. You’ll need to set the start and end points before re-recording. In the eight-measure example below, measures three through five are re-recorded. Song Play [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE Before re-recording 1 [F3] TRACK Recording start Recording stop Punch in Punch out 2 3 4 5 6 [F6] CHAIN Song Record 7 8 Song Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK After re-recording [F6] ALL TR 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Newly recorded data During Song Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] REST NOTE Punch In/Out Recording can only be used with Realtime recording. NOTE Note that the Punch In/Out method always replaces (erases) the original data over the specified area. [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Basic Procedure in the Song Job Mode Arpeggio Edit [F1] COMMON 1 Press the [JOB] button to enter the Song Job. 2 Select the desired Job menu by pressing one of the [F1] – [F6] buttons. 3 Move the cursor to the desired Job by using the [DATA] dial, cursor buttons, [INC] and [DEC] buttons, then press the [ENTER] button to call up the Job display. [F2] TYPE [F3] MAIN 4 [F4] LIMIT [F5] PLAY FX Move the cursor to the desired parameter, then set the value by using the [DATA] dial, [INC] and [DEC] buttons. [F6] OUT CH Song Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F4] TR SEL 5 After setting, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F5] INSERT “Completed” will appear when the Job is done. [F6] DELETE Song Job NOTICE In some Jobs, the operation overwrites any data previously existing in the destination memory. Important data should always be saved to a USB flash memory device connected to the USB TO [DEVICE] terminal. [F1] UNDO/REDO 6 [F3] EVENT Press the [EXIT] button twice to go back to the Song Play display. [F2] NOTE [F4] MEAS NOTICE Even if a Job operation has been completed, selecting a different Song or turning the power off without storing will erase the Song data. Make sure to store the Song data to internal memory by pressing the [STORE] button before selecting a different Song or turning the power off. [F5] TRACK [F6] SONG Supplementary Information NOTE In some Jobs, you need specify the range (start point and end point as illustrated below) to which the Job is applied. Keep in mind that the end point itself is not included in the range. The actual range to which the Job is applied is from the start point to the point that is one clock less than the end point. This rule applies to cases in which you specify only the Measure; however, the example illustration below shows Measure, Beat and Clock all specified. Start point End point NOTE In some jobs, when the cursor is located on such a parameter, the NUM icon appears at the lower right corner of the display. In this case, you can also set this parameter by using the window for inputting a number directly called up via the [SF6] NUM button. To close the window, press the [EXIT] button MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 100 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode Pattern Mode Pattern Play The Pattern mode lets you play, record, edit and play your own original rhythm patterns. This section explains each parameter in four types (Pattern Play, Pattern Record, Pattern Edit, and Pattern Job). NOTE The word “Pattern” refers to a short rhythmic passage of several measures which is looped and played back indefinitely. A Pattern includes 16 variations called “Sections.” You can use Sections by changing them during playback. A Pattern consists of 16 Tracks and can be created by assigning a Phrase to each Track from the PATCH display (page 102). For details about the Patterns, Sections and Phrases, see page 9. [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN Pattern Play Pattern Record Pattern Play is the main “portal” by which you enter the Pattern mode, and it is here where you select and play a Pattern. Pattern Record Standby You can also create your own Patterns by assembling Phrases—which are short rhythmic passages and “building [F1] SETUP blocks”—and create Pattern Chains in which Patterns can be combined together in any desired order. [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED Operation Press the [PATTERN] button. [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP [F1] PLAY [F3] RESET Same as in the Song Play mode. See page 76. Note that the function of registering Scenes is not available in the Pattern [F4] TIE mode. The [SF1] – [SF6] buttons are assigned to ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) – ARP6 (Arpeggio 6). Also, the “Loc” (Location) [F5] DELETE parameter is not in the PLAY display of the Pattern mode, and the following parameters are contained in the display. [F6] BAK DEL Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE 1 2 [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE 1 (Keyboard Start) When this parameter is set to on, Pattern playback begins as soon as you press a key on of the keyboard. Settings: (on), (off) NOTE From the PLAY display in the Pattern mode, you can select the Voice of the Mixing Part corresponding to the current Track by pressing the [CATEGORY SEARCH] button. Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] PHRASE 2 Length [F5] TRACK Determines the Pattern Length. This value will be the length of the Phrase created after recording. [F6] PATTERN Settings: 001 – 256 Supplementary Information [F2] GROOVE (Grid Groove) Same as the GROOVE display in the Song mode. See page 77. [F3] TRACK Same as the TRACK display in the Song mode. See page 78. Please note that the [SF6] TR LOOP display is not available in the TRACK display of the Pattern mode. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 101 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode [F4] PATCH Pattern Play From this display, you can assign a Preset Phrase or a User Phrase (recorded in the Pattern Record mode) to each [F1] PLAY Track and create a Pattern that contains up to 16 Tracks. You can assign a User Phrase created with the currently [F2] GROOVE selected Pattern. If you wish to use User Phrases recorded to Tracks of other Patterns, use the Phrase Data Copy function, selected with the [SF6] COPY button. [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH 1 [F5] REMIX 2 [F6] CHAIN Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE 3 4 [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK 1 Phrase Number Determines the Phrase number to be assigned to a Track. You can select one of the 256 User Phrases stored to the During Pattern Recording selected Pattern. Note that by default the User Phrases have no data. [F1] SETUP When set to “---,” the Track becomes empty. [F3] RESET Settings: --- (off), 001 – 256 [F4] TIE NOTE The MOX6/MOX8 features no Preset Phrase data. [F5] DELETE 2 Number of Measures [F6] BAK DEL Indicates the name of the selected Phrase. Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE 3 Section Shows the Section being currently edited. To change the Section, press the [PATTERN SECTION] button, and then use [F2] VIEW FLT the Number [1] – [16] buttons. Pressing the [PATTERN SECTION] assigns the Sections A – P to numbers [1] – [16] in [F5] INSERT sequence. Then, pressing the appropriate Number [1] – [16] buttons lets you change the Section. [F6] DELETE Pattern Job 4 Meas (Measure) Shows Measure and Beat for current playback location. [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [SF5] CLEAR [F4] PHRASE This clears the Phrase assignment to the currently selected Track and leaves the Track empty. [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN [SF6] COPY Supplementary Information Source Pattern number, Phrase number Destination Phrase and Track of the Pattern being currently edited The User Phrases that can be assigned with the Patch function are limited to the ones contained in the currently selected Pattern. This function lets you copy Phrases in another Pattern to the selected one. Press the [SF6] to call up the following display. After setting the parameters as needed, press the [ENTER] to copy the Phrase data. NOTICE Any previous data in the copy destination will be overwritten. Therefore, you should regularly create backup copies of important data on a USB flash-memory device or the like. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 102 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode [F5] REMIX Pattern Play This function gives you a variety of semi-random presets for dividing the MIDI sequence data and altering the note [F1] PLAY lengths, letting you create completely new variations of a Pattern. Set the parameters below, then press the [ENTER] [F2] GROOVE button to execute the Remix operation. If you want to keep the changes, press the [SF5] OK button. To return to the original display without altering the data, press the [SF4] CANCEL button. NOTE Since the remixed data is stored as a new Phrase and assigned to the current Track, the original Phrase data remains as an [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX unassigned Phrase. [F6] CHAIN Type Determines how the data in the selected Track will be divided and rearranged. The division and rearrangement rules are Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby different for each remix type. [F1] SETUP Settings: 1 – 16 [F2] VOICE Var (Variation) [F3] ARP ED Determines how the original MIDI sequence data will be modified. [F5] CLICK Settings: Normal 1 – 16, Roll 1 – 16, Break 1 – 16, Fill 1 – 48 Normal 1 – 16 .... The original data is sliced and rearranged only. 16 variations are available. Roll 1 – 16.......... In addition to rearrangement of the divided data, some portions of the data may be played with a roll effect. 16 variations are available. Break 1 – 16 ...... In addition to division and rearrangement, some portions of the data may be deleted to create breaks. 16 variations are available. Fill 1 – 48 .......... In addition to rearrangement of the divided data, some portions of the data may be played with a roll effect. 48 variations are available. During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] RESET [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Interval Determines the measure(s) to which Remix is applied. For example, when set to “1,” Remix is applied to all measures. When set to “2,” Remix is applied to the data of every 2nd measure: 2, 4, 6, 8, and so on. When set to “3,” Remix is Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE applied to the data of every 3rd measure: 3, 6, 9, 12, and so on. [F2] VIEW FLT Settings: 1 – 8 [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job [F6] CHAIN [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE NOTE For instructions, see the “Quick Guide” of the Owner’s Manual. [F3] EVENT Pattern Chain Play [F4] PHRASE [F5] TRACK Operation [PATTERN] [F6] CHAIN [F6] PATTERN This mode lets you play the programmed Section chain sequence created in Pattern Record and Pattern Edit. The Supplementary Information parameters are the same as in the [F1] PLAY display (page 101). Pattern Chain Record Pattern Chain Record Standby mode Operation [PATTERN] [F6] CHAIN [REC] Recording Track You can select one of the following Tracks for recording. • patt (Pattern): Records Section changes during playback • tempo: Records tempo change information during playback • scene: Records Track mute settings during playback MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 103 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Pattern Mode During Pattern Recording Operation FILE [PATTERN] [F6] CHAIN [REC] [R] (Play) Pattern Play [F1] PLAY When recording the Pattern Track, you can change the Section. When recording the tempo Track, you can change the [F2] GROOVE tempo value. When the Scene Track is selected, you can record Track muting settings. [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH Pattern Chain Edit [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN Operation [PATTERN] [F6] CHAIN [EDIT] Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby [F1] CHANGE [F1] SETUP The Pattern Chain Edit mode makes it possible to edit the order of the Sections in a chain, as well as insert tempo, and scene/mute event data. Call up the desired Track display by pressing the [F4] TR SEL button to edit the selected Track. [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED Pattern Track Edit From this display, you can edit the Section changes for each measure. To set the end of the chain, enter an END mark at the appropriate measure. To clear the event at the currently selected location, press the [F6] CLEAR button. [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP Scene Track Edit [F3] RESET You can edit the Track mute change in beats. Use the [F5] INSERT and [F6] DELETE buttons to insert/delete the event. [F4] TIE Tempo Track Edit [F6] BAK DEL You can edit the tempo change in beats. Use the [F5] INSERT and [F6] DELETE buttons to insert/delete the event. [F2] COPY [F5] DELETE Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT Source range [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE Top measure of destination [F3] EVENT [F4] PHRASE This display lets you copy all Pattern chain events from a specified range of measures (source) to a destination location. After specifying the source range in measures, the top measure of the destination location, and “NumberOfTimes” (number of times the data is copied), press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation. [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information NOTICE This operation overwrites any events already existing at the destination. [F3] SONG Destination Song Top measure of the destination Song This function converts the Pattern chain data to Song data (standard MIDI format) and places the results in normal Song Tracks. After specifying the desired destination Song and measure number to which the converted data is to be copied, press the [ENTER] button to execute. When the “without PC” (without Program Change) box is checkmarked, the settings of the Mixing and Tempo are copied to the destination Song. The Tempo value is copied to the top measure of the destination Song. When the checkmark is removed, the Voice settings in each Phrase are also copied to the top measure of the destination Song as Program Change events. NOTICE This operation overwrites any data already existing at the destination range. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 104 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Pattern Record FILE Pattern Mode Pattern Play Pattern Record Standby mode Operation [PATTERN] Pattern selection [REC] [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX [F1] SETUP NOTE The Phrase length is specified by the length parameter in the PLAY display of the Pattern mode. [F6] CHAIN Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP Type Determines the Recording Type. The Recording Type can be divided into two groups: Realtime recording and Step recording. With Realtime recording, the instrument functions in the same way as a tape recorder, recording the performance data as it is played. This allows you to capture all the nuances of an actual performance. In Realtime recording, the “Type” should be set to “replace,” “overdub,” or “punch.” With Step recording, you can compose your performance by “writing” it down one event at a time. This is a non-realtime, step recording method—similar to writing music notation onto paper. In Step recording, the “Type” should be set to “step.” Settings: replace, overdub, step [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] RESET [F4] TIE Loop [F5] DELETE Turns loop recording on or off. When set to on, the Phrase will play repeatedly during Realtime recording. This can be handy when recording drum parts, allowing you to add different instruments on each pass. When set to off, recording stops after one pass through the Phrase. Settings: off, on [F6] BAK DEL Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT Quantize This is same as “Quantize” in the SETUP display of Song Record (page 79). Event [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job This is same as “Event” in the SETUP display of Song Record (page 79). (Tempo) [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE Determines the Pattern tempo. [F3] EVENT Settings: 005.0 – 300 [F4] PHRASE NOTE Unlike in Songs, Scene Track and Tempo Track are not available for Patterns. [F5] TRACK NOTE If you are using this instrument with an external sequencer, DAW software, or MIDI device, and you want to synchronize it with [F6] PATTERN that device, set the “MIDI Sync” parameter in the Utility MIDI display (page 149) to “external” or “auto.” When “MIDI Sync” is set to “auto” (only when MIDI clock is transmitted continuously) or “external,” the Tempo parameter here indicates “external” and cannot be changed. Supplementary Information NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” Meas (Measure) Determines the measure from which Pattern recording will be started. [F2] VOICE In this display you can set the voice related parameters for the recording Track. The settings here affect the Part for which the receive channel (set in the Mixing mode) matches the transmit (output) channel of the recording Track. Parameters are the same as in the VOICE display (page 80) in Song Record. [F3] ARP ED (Arpeggio Edit) Indicates the Arpeggio Edit display in the Pattern mode. Parameters are the same as in the Arpeggio Edit display (page 82) in the Song mode. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 105 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode [F5] CLICK Pattern Play Pressing the [F5] CLICK button lets you turn the click sound (metronome) on/off for recording. [F1] PLAY NOTE In the CLICK display (page 144), you can make various settings for the metronome click, such as the note resolution, volume, [F2] GROOVE and lead-in count for recording. [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH During Pattern Recording In Realtime recording, the editable parameters during recording are in the [F1] SETUP display, [F2] VOICE display, and [F3] ARP ED display of the Pattern recording standby mode. In Step recording, the displays shown during recording are different from the Song recording standby mode. In this case, the editable parameters are the same as the parameters shown during Step recording in Song Record (page 81). [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE Operation [PATTERN] Pattern selection [REC] [R] (Play) [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording Pattern Edit Same as Song Edit. See page 84. The only difference here is that the [F4] TR SEL display is not shown. [F1] SETUP [F3] RESET [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] PHRASE [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 106 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode Pattern Job The Pattern Job mode contains a comprehensive set of editing tools and functions you can use to change the sound of Pattern Play the Pattern. The setting instructions are the same as in the Song Job (page 87). After setting parameters as required in [F1] PLAY the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK NOTICE An “Executing...” message is shown when it takes a short amount of time to execute the Job. Never attempt to turn off the power while an “Executing...” message is shown. Turning the power off in this state results in loss of all user data. Operation [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN [PATTERN] Pattern selection [JOB] Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] VOICE The Undo Job cancels the changes you made in your most recent recording session, editing session, or Job, restoring the data to its previous state. This allows you to recover from accidental data loss. Redo is available only after using Undo, and lets you restore the changes you made before undoing them. [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP NOTICE Undo/Redo does not work with Mixing Voice operations. [F3] RESET [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F2] NOTE (Note data Job) The Note data Jobs in the Pattern mode are basically same as in the Song Job mode. However, unlike in the Song Job, Pattern [F6] BAK DEL Specify the Phrase and the range (in measures/beats/clocks) over which the Job is applied. Event Jobs are applied to the Phrases (001 – 256) and a selected range in the Phrase (measure : beat : clock). Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT (Event Job) [F3] EVENT The Event Jobs in the Pattern Job are basically the same as in the Song Job mode. However, unlike in the Song Job, [F4] PHRASE Pattern Event Jobs are applied to the Phrases (001 – 256) and a selected range in the Phrase (measure : beat : clock). [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN 01: Shift Clock Supplementary Information Same as in Song Job. See page 91. 02: Copy Event Same as in Song Job. See page 91. 03: Erase Event Same as in Song Job. See page 91. NOTE Unlike in Song Job, you cannot select “Tempo,” “Scene Memory,” or “Track Mute” as Event Types. 04: Extract Event Same as in Song Job. See page 92. 05: Create Continuous Data Same as in Song Job. See page 92. NOTE Unlike in Song Job, you cannot select “Tempo” as an Event Type. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 107 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode 06: Thin Out Pattern Play Same as in Song Job. See page 93. [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE 07: Modify Control Data [F3] TRACK Same as in Song Job. See page 93. [F4] PATCH NOTE Unlike in Song Job, you cannot select “Tempo” as an Event Type. [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN 08: Beat Stretch Pattern Record Same as in Song Job. See page 93. Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F4] PHRASE (Phrase Job) [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK 01: Copy Phrase This Job copies a selected Phrase to the designated destination Phrase. After specifying the source Pattern/Phrase, During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP Selects the Pattern and Phrase to be copied. (Preset Phrases also can be selected.) [F3] RESET and the destination Pattern/Phrase, as well as setting the [F4] TIE checkboxes as necessary, press the [ENTER] button to [F5] DELETE execute this Job. [F6] BAK DEL Pattern Edit NOTICE Any previous data in the copy destination will be overwritten. [F1] CHANGE Specify the destination Pattern and Phrase. 02: Exchange Phrase [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE This Job exchanges or “swaps” the contents of two specified Phrases (“A” and “B”). Pattern Job 03: Mix Phrase This Job mixes all data from two selected user Phrases (“A” and [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE Phrase A Phrase B “B”), and places the result in Phrase B. [F3] EVENT [F4] PHRASE Mix Phrase Phrase B [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information 04: Append Phrase This Job appends one Phrase (A) to the end of another (B) to Phrase A create one longer Phrase (B). Append Phrase Phrase B 05: Split Phrase This Job splits a selected Phrase (A) into two separate Phrases (A and B). Phrase A is divided at the Split Point. The data before the Phrase A is divided at the Split Point Phrase A split point is stored to the original Phrase A and the data after the split point is moved and stored to Phrase B. You can also set the Meter of Phrases A and B after the Split Phrase Job is executed. NOTE When either Pattern or Phrase is set to “off,” the split Phrase B data is erased. Phrase A Phrase B NOTICE The job overwrites any data already existing in destination Phrase B. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 108 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Pattern Mode 06: Get Phrase From Song This Job copies a segment of sequence-Track data from a FILE Pattern Play Source Song, Track, and range of measures to be copied. Song into the designated destination Phrase. After specifying [F1] PLAY the source Song/Track/Measure and the destination Phrase, as [F2] GROOVE well as setting the checkboxes as necessary, press the [F3] TRACK [ENTER] to execute this Job. [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX NOTICE This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Phrase. [F6] CHAIN Destination Phrase Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby 07: Put Phrase To Song [F1] SETUP This Job copies a selected user Phrase into a specified area of [F2] VOICE Source Phrase a selected Song. After specifying the source Phrase and [F3] ARP ED destination Song/Track/top measure, press the [ENTER] button [F5] CLICK to execute this Job. During Pattern Recording NOTICE [F1] SETUP This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Track. [F3] RESET Destination Song, Track, and top measures 08: Clear Phrase [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL This Job deletes all data from the selected Phrase. Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE 09: Phrase Name [F2] VIEW FLT This Job lets you assign a name (of up to eight characters) to the selected Phrase. For detailed instructions on naming, see the “Basic Operation” of the Owner’s Manual. [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F5] TRACK (Track Job) [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT 01: Copy Track [F4] PHRASE This Job copies all data of the selected type from a specified source Track to a specified destination Track. The types of Source Pattern, Section, and Track Destination Pattern, Section, and Track data to be copied are the same as in Song Job. See page 95. 02: Exchange Track This Job exchanges or “swaps” the specified type of data [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information Types of data to be copied Target Tracks for the Exchange operation between two specified Tracks in the current Pattern and Section. The types of data to be exchanged are the same as in Song Job. See page 95. Types of data to be exchanged MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 109 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Pattern Mode 03: Clear Track This Job deletes all data of the selected type from the FILE Pattern Play Section and Track from which data is to be cleared selected Pattern Track. The types of data to be cleared are [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE the same as in Song Job. See page 95. [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX 04: Normalize Play Effect [F6] CHAIN Types of data to be cleared Pattern Record This Job rewrites the data in the selected Track so that it incorporates the current Grid Groove settings. After specifying a Track (TR 01 – 16) to which this Job is applied, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE 05: Divide Drum Track [F3] ARP ED Separates the note events in a drum performance assigned to a specified Track, and places the notes corresponding to different drum instruments in separate Tracks (Tracks 1 through 8). After specifying a Track (TR 01 – 16) to which this [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording Job is applied, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. [F1] SETUP NOTE This job requires eight empty User Phrases in which to store the separated note data. If there aren’t enough empty Phrases, an [F3] RESET error message appears. If this happens, use the Clear Track Job (above) to delete some User Phrases, then try the Job again. [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE 06: Put Track To Arp (Put Track to Arpeggio) [F6] BAK DEL This Job copies data in the specified measures of a Section/Track for creating Arpeggio data. For details, see page 126. Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F6] PATTERN (Pattern Job) [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE 01: Copy Pattern This Job copies all data from a selected source Pattern to a Pattern Job Source Pattern and Section Destination Pattern and Section [F1] UNDO/REDO selected destination Pattern. After specifying the source [F2] NOTE Pattern/Section, and the destination Pattern/Section, as well as [F3] EVENT setting the checkboxes as necessary, press the [ENTER] button to execute this Job. NOTE If you set the source Section to “all,” the destination Section is also set to “all” automatically. In this status, execute this Job to copy the entire source Pattern data to the destination. [F4] PHRASE [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information Duplicate User Phrase When this box is checkmarked, User Phrases (if included in the source Pattern) are copied to another User Phrase, which will be assigned to the destination Pattern. NOTE If the source Pattern number is same as the destination Pattern number, User Phrases are not copied to another User Phrase. Chain When this box is checkmarked, Pattern chain data (if included in the source Pattern) is copied to the destination Pattern. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 110 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Pattern Mode 02: Append Pattern Appends one Pattern to the end of another to create one longer Pattern with all 16 Tracks. FILE Source Pattern and Section Pattern Play Destination Pattern and Section [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE NOTE If the Pattern length becomes greater than 256 measures as a result of the Append Pattern Job, an error message will be displayed and the Job will be aborted. [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH Keep Original Phrase [F5] REMIX When this box is checkmarked, the original destination Pattern [F6] CHAIN data is retained in memory, along with the new appended Pattern Record Pattern data. NOTE If the box is not checkmarked, the original destination Pattern is erased and replaced with the newly created data. When the “Keep Original Phrase” checkbox is checked, this job requires twice the number of empty User Phrases as the number of Tracks containing data in which to store the appended Phrase data. If the required space is not available, an alert message will appear and the Job will be aborted. If this occurs use the Clear Phrase Job to delete unused Phrases then try again. Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK 03: Split Pattern During Pattern Recording This Job splits a selected Pattern (all 16 Tracks data) into two [F1] SETUP Patterns. After the Split Pattern operation, the part of the Pattern before the specified Split Point will remain, and the part following the “Split Point” will be moved to the destination [F3] RESET Source Pattern and Section Destination Pattern and Section Pattern. NOTICE This Job overwrites any data already existing in the destination Pattern. Split Point Determines the Split Point by setting a measure number. [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Keep Original Phrase When this box is checkmarked, the original Source Pattern data is retained in memory and the results of the Split Job are written to empty Phrases. When this box is not checkmarked, the original Source Pattern is erased and replaced Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO with the newly created data. [F2] NOTE NOTE When the “Keep Original Phrase” checkbox is checked, this Job requires twice the number of empty User Phrases as the [F3] EVENT number of Tracks containing data in which to store the appended Phrase data. If the required space is unavailable, an alert message will appear and the Job will be aborted. If this occurs use the Clear Phrase Job (page 109) to delete unused Phrases and try again. [F4] PHRASE [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN 04: Clear Pattern Supplementary Information This Job deletes all data from the selected Pattern, or from all Patterns. When the specific Section is selected to be cleared, you can unmark the “Chain” box. If the “Chain” box is not checkmarked, the Pattern Chain data will be kept even though the Clear Pattern Job is executed. 05: Pattern Name This Job lets you assign a name to the selected Pattern. For detailed instructions on naming, see the “Basic Operation” of the Owner’s Manual. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 111 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Pattern Mode Supplementary Information Pattern Play [F1] PLAY Pattern Playback Types [F2] GROOVE [F3] TRACK Starting playback by pressing a note [F4] PATCH When the Keyboard Start function is set to on, Pattern playback begins as soon as you press a key on the keyboard. Move the cursor to the Keyboard Start icon then press the [INC] button in the PLAY display of the Pattern Play to enable Keyboard Start. In this status, press any key to start Pattern playback. [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN Pattern Record Keyboard Start Pattern Record Standby [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP Changing the Section during playback To change Sections during playback, press the [PATTERN SECTION] button (the lamp lights), then use the Number [1] [F3] RESET [F4] TIE – [16] buttons. When selecting a different Section during Pattern playback, “NT” and the next Section name appear in [F5] DELETE the Section column at the top of the display. After the current Section reaches the timing specified in “PtnQuantize” [F6] BAK DEL (page 145) in the [F2] SEQ display of the Utility mode, the next Section starts. If you record rhythm patterns such as intro, melody A, fill-in, main theme, and ending to each of the Sections, you can play an entire Song by selecting the appropriate Sections during playback. Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT Current Section or Next Section is indicated here. [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] PHRASE Pattern Chain Playback The Pattern Chain function lets you program Sections in your own custom order, and have them change automatically [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information during playback to create a seamless sequence of backing parts and accompaniment for your live performance or recorded Song. The Chain Play display (page 103) is the “portal” for entering the Pattern Chain function and lets you play back the programmed Pattern Chain. Press the [F6] CHAIN button from Pattern Play to go to the Pattern Chain Play display. Pattern Chains can be created from the Chain Record display (page 103) and the Insert function (page 104) in the Chain Edit display. Pattern Chains can be edited in the Chain Edit display (page 104). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 112 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Loop Recording (Pattern) FILE Pattern Mode Pattern Play Operation [PATTERN] [REC] [F1] SETUP “Loop” = “on” [F1] PLAY [F2] GROOVE Pattern repeats the rhythm pattern of several measures (1 to 256 measures) in a “loop,” and its recording is also done using loops. This method is used when recording a Pattern Phrase using the Overdub method. When recording a rhythm of Bass Drum, Snare Drum, Hi-Hat cymbal in order: [F3] TRACK [F4] PATCH [F5] REMIX [F6] CHAIN Loop 1st round Pattern Record Pattern Record Standby Bass Drum [F1] SETUP [F2] VOICE [F3] ARP ED Loop 2nd round Snare Drum Bass Drum [F5] CLICK During Pattern Recording [F1] SETUP [F3] RESET [F4] TIE [F5] DELETE [F6] BAK DEL Loop 3rd round Hi-Hat Snare Drum Bass Drum Pattern Edit [F1] CHANGE [F2] VIEW FLT [F5] INSERT [F6] DELETE NOTE Loop Recording can only be used with Realtime recording. Pattern Job [F1] UNDO/REDO [F2] NOTE [F3] EVENT [F4] PHRASE [F5] TRACK [F6] PATTERN Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 113 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Mixing Mode FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play The settings of the tone generator block for Song/Pattern playback are collectively referred to as a Mixing. The Mixing mode lets you change the Voice and effect settings for each Part. This section explains each parameter in four types (Mixing Play, Mixing Edit, Mixing Job, and Mixing Voice Edit). Keep in mind that Pattern Mixing parameters are not [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE actually part of the Pattern sequence data in each Track, but rather are settings for the tone generator, as it is played [F3] EF SEND back by the Pattern data. As such, the Mixing parameter settings are not recorded to the Song/Pattern Tracks. [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED NOTICE The settings in Mixing Play/Mixing Edit are stored as part of Song/Pattern data. NOTE Parameter settings in Mixing Play and Mixing Edit can be stored as a template to internal Flash ROM, as well as being stored as part of a Song/Pattern. For details, see page 126. [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL Mixing Play [F2] MFX [F3] MEQ The Mixing Play display will appear when pressing the [MIXING] button in the Song mode or Pattern mode. Here you [F4] USB I/O can edit the Mixing parameters which are important for creating a Song/Pattern. [F5] A/D IN Operation [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan) [F3] EQ [F4] TONE PAN Determines the stereo pan position for each part. Settings: L63 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT VOLUME Determines the volume for each Part allowing you to set the optimum level balance of all the Parts. Settings: 0 – 127 [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit [F2] VOICE Common Edit [F1] GENERAL VOICENUM (Voice Number) BANK MSB/LSB (Bank Select MSB/LSB) Determines the Voice for each Part. Mixing Voices can also be selected. NOTE The Category Search function can also be used to select Voices here, except for Mixing Voices. P.WithVce (Parameter with Voice) Determines whether or not the following parameter settings of the selected Voice are copied from the Voice to the current Part when you change a Voice for the current Part individually. • Arpeggio settings • Filter Cutoff Frequency [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER • Filter Resonance [F4] AMP • Amplitude EG [F5] LFO • Filter EG • Pitch Bend Range (Upper/Lower) • Note Shift NOTE Regardless of the “P.WithVce” setting, the following settings are always copied when a Normal Voice is selected: “Mono/Poly,” “Switch” (Portamento Part Switch), “Time” (Portamento Time) and “Mode” (Portamento Mode). Settings: off (not copied), on (copied) [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 114 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F3] EF SEND (Effect Send) FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play From this display you can make basic effect settings for each Part—including Send Level for the System Effects [F1] VOL/PAN (Chorus, Reverb,) as well as the Dry Level for Insertion Effects. [F2] VOICE NOTE For information on the effect connections in the Song mode, see page 20. [F3] EF SEND [F4] TEMPLATE [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT [SF1] MIX (Mixing) Mixing Edit Common Edit From this display you can copy the Mixing Template to the Mixing settings of currently edited Part. After selecting a [F1] GENERAL desired Template, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation. [F2] MFX NOTE In addition to the Mixing settings, the tempo setting stored in the Mixing Template will also be automatically loaded. [F3] MEQ NOTE For instruction on storing the Mixing settings as a Mixing Template, see page 126. [SF2] PERFORM (Performance) [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT This convenient operation lets you copy certain settings of the each Part in a performance to the Mixing program currently being edited. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Copy operation. NOTE This display is similar to the [SF3] PERFORM display in Mixing Job (page 121). However, this differs from the [SF3] PERFORM display in two major points: • All parameters are copied simultaneously. • The Receive Channel settings are assigned to the destination automatically. NOTE For those Parts which Part Switch is set to OFF, Receive Channel is also set to OFF. NOTE In addition to the Part settings, the Arpeggio tempo setting stored in the Performance will also be copied. Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT [F5] VCE ED (Mixing Voice Edit) [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY Press the [F5] VCE ED button in Mixing Play to enter Mixing Voice Edit. Press the [EXIT] button to return to the original display. Normal Voices can be edited specifically for use with the Song/Pattern modes, creating a dedicated “Mixing Voice.” For details, see the “Mixing Voice Edit” on page 122. [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F6] EFFECT Pressing the [F3] EFFECT button in the Mixing mode calls up the [SONG]/[PATTERN] [MIXING] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F6] EFFECT display in Mixing Edit. From this display, you can set the Effect related parameters for the current Song/Pattern. For details, see page 116. [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 115 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Edit The Mixing Edit mode lets you control typical mixer settings such as volume balance, pan position and effects, allowing Mixing Play you to fine tune the Song/Pattern data. Mixing Edit consists of Part Edit and Common Edit. This section explains the [F1] VOL/PAN parameters for Common Edit and Part Edit. [F2] VOICE [F3] EF SEND Common Edit [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED Operation [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX A.Func1 (Assignable Function 1) A.Func2 (Assignable Function 2) Determines whether the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1] and [2] buttons function as latch (hold) type or momentary type in the selected Song/Pattern. Settings: momentary, latch [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] MFX (Master Effect) [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ From this display you can set the Master Effect related parameters. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit (page 60). [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F3] MEQ (Master EQ) [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL From this display you can set parameters related to the Master Equalizer. You can assign any of five different Equalizer bands to the entire Multi. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit (page 61). [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit [F4] USB I/O Common Edit [F1] GENERAL Determines the specific output(s) for the individual Part signal. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit (page 61). [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F5] A/D IN (A/D Input) [F6] EFFECT Element Edit This display sets parameters related to the input from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks. The parameters are the same as in [F1] OSC Performance Common Edit (page 62). [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F6] EFFECT From this display you can set the Effect related parameters. The parameters are the same as in Performance Common Edit (page 63). [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 116 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Mixing Mode Part Edit Mixing Play Operation [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Number [1] – [16] [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE [F3] EF SEND [F1] VOICE Determines the Voice for each Part. This display shows only four Parts at a time (Part 1 – 4, Part 5 – 8, Part 9 – 12, or Part 13 – 16). To switch the editable Parts, press the Cursor [<]/[>] buttons. The editable Parts can be also switched by pressing the corresponding buttons to other Parts of numbers [1] – [16] after pressing the [TRACK] button. [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit [SF1] VOICE [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX Determines the Voice for each Part. [F3] MEQ Bank [F4] USB I/O Determines the Voice Bank for each Part. For information about settings other than those of the Mixing Voices, see page [F5] A/D IN 7. [F6] EFFECT Number Determines the Voice Program number for each Part. P.WithVce (Parameter with Voice) Determines whether or not the following parameter settings of the selected Voice are copied from the Voice to the current Part when you change a Voice for the current Part individually. • Arpeggio settings • Filter Cutoff Frequency • Filter Resonance • Amplitude EG • Filter EG Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL • Pitch Bend Range (Upper/Lower) [F3] COPY • Note Shift [F4] BULK NOTE When a Normal Voice is assigned to the Part, the following settings are always copied to the Part regardless of the “P.WithVce” setting. On the other hand, when a Drum Voice is assigned to the part, the following settings are not copied to the part regardless of the “P.WithVce” setting. • “Mono/Poly” • “Switch” (Portamento Part Switch) • “Time” (Portamento Time) • “Mode” (Portamento Mode) Settings: off (not copied), on (copied) Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT [SF2] MODE Mono/Poly Element Edit [F1] OSC Selects monophonic or polyphonic playback for each Part. Monophonic is for single notes only, while polyphonic is for [F2] PITCH playing multiple simultaneous notes. [F3] FILTER Settings: mono, poly [F4] AMP NOTE This parameter is not available for the Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. [F5] LFO ReceiveCh (Receive Channel) Determines the MIDI receive channel for the selected Part. Since MIDI data may be coming from many channels at [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job once, you should set this to match the particular channel over which the desired controlling data is being sent. [F2] RECALL Settings: 1 – 16, off [F3] COPY ArpPlyOnly (Arpeggio Play Only) Determines whether or not the current Part plays only the note events of Arpeggio playback. When this parameter is set [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information to on, only the note events of Arpeggio playback affect the tone generator block. Settings: off, on MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 117 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF3] LIMIT From this display you can determine the note range and velocity range for each Part. The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 65. FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE [SF4] PORTA (Portamento) [F3] EF SEND [F4] TEMPLATE Determines the Portamento parameters for each Part. The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 65. [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT [SF5] VEL SENS (Velocity Sensitivity) Mixing Edit Common Edit The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 65. [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX [SF6] OTHER The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 66. [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT [F2] OUTPUT Determines the Voice for each Part. This display shows only four Parts at a time (Part 1 – 4, Part 5 – 8, Part 9 – 12, or Part 13 – 16). To switch the editable Parts, press the Cursor [<]/[>] buttons. The editable Parts can be also switched by pressing the corresponding buttons to other Parts of numbers [1] – [16] after pressing the [TRACK] button. Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [SF1] VOL/PAN (Volume/Pan) The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 66. [SF2] EF SEND (Effect Send) [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 66. [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit [F3] EQ (Equalizer) Common Edit [F1] GENERAL From this display you can set parameters related to the Part EQ. The parameters are the same as in Performance Part [F2] OUTPUT Edit. See page 67. [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT [F4] TONE Element Edit [F1] OSC [SF1] TUNE The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 68. [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [SF2] FILTER [F5] LFO [F6] EQ The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page 68. [SF3] FEG (Filter EG) From this display you can set the FEG parameters for each Part. The parameters offset the same parameters of the assigned Voice set in the Voice mode (page 42). The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information 68. NOTE These FEG parameters are not available for the Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 118 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF4] AEG (Amplitude EG) From this display you can set the AEG parameters for each Part. The parameters offset the same parameters of the assigned Voice set in the Voice mode (page 44). The parameters are the same as in Performance Part Edit. See page FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN 68. [F2] VOICE NOTE The Sustain setting is not available for Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. [F3] EF SEND NOTE The Release setting is not available for Parts to which Drum Voices have been assigned. [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED [F5] RCV SW (Receive Switch) From this display you can set how each individual Part responds to various MIDI data, such as Control Change and [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” the corresponding Part responds to the [F1] GENERAL appropriate MIDI data. Note that two different display types listed below are provided and you can switch between them [F2] MFX by pressing the [SF5] button. The two display types are linked and feature the same settings, only in different formats. Use the type you feel most comfortable with. [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O Display showing four Parts [F5] A/D IN This display type shows the Receive Switch status for four Parts at a time. Set the desired Part on or off, for the [F6] EFFECT corresponding MIDI data type. To view and edit another set of four Parts, press the appropriate Number button, [1] to [16]. Part Edit [F1] VOICE Display showing all parameters for one Part [F2] OUTPUT This display type shows all of the Receive Switch settings for a single selected Part. Set the desired MIDI data type on [F3] EQ or off for the selected Part. To select other Parts, use the Number [1] – [16] buttons (making sure that the [TRACK] button is on). The function is the same as the one in the RCV SW display (page 69) in the Performance Part Edit mode. In addition to the parameters which can be set in the Performance Part Edit mode, Program Change and Bank Select can be set in this display of the Mixing mode. [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 119 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Job The Performance Job features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required in the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE Operation [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [JOB] [F3] EF SEND [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED [F1] INIT (Initialize) [F6] EFFECT Resets (initializes) all Mixing parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Part, and so on—very useful when creating a completely new Mixing Edit Common Edit Performance from scratch. [F1] GENERAL Type of parameter to be initialized: [F2] MFX GM, All, Common (Common parameter settings for the selected Mixing), Part 1 – 16, A/D (A/D input part) [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F2] RECALL (Edit Recall) [F6] EFFECT If you are editing a Mixing program and select a different program without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Mixing program with your latest edits intact. Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F3] COPY [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW [SF1] PART Mixing Job Source Song and Part [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit Destination Song (current Song) and Part [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT From this display you can copy Part parameter settings from any Mixing program including the currently edited (but not yet stored) one to a particular Part of the Mixing program you are editing. This would come in handy when you want to [F4] CTL SET use some settings from another program. The procedure is basically the same as in the [F3] COPY display in the [F5] LFO Performance Job. See page 70. [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [SF2] VOICE This Job lets you copy the settings of the Voice Common Edit to the current Mixing. This would come in handy when a [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH certain Voice has effect settings that you want to use in your Mixing program. You can check the appropriate check [F3] FILTER boxes for the desired settings of the Reverb Effect, Chorus Effect, Master Effect, and Master EQ to execute this job. [F4] AMP NOTE Mixing Voices cannot be selected as source Voices. [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 120 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF3] PERFORM (Performance) This convenient operation lets you copy certain settings of the four Parts in a performance to the Mixing program currently being edited. You can check the appropriate check boxes for the desired settings of the Reverb Effect, Chorus FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN Effect, Master Effect, Master EQ, Insertion Effect, and A/D input part to execute this job. This would come in handy when [F2] VOICE a certain Performance has settings that you want to use in your Mixing program. This is similar to [F4] TEMPLATE [F3] EF SEND [SF2] PERFORM display (page 115) in the Mixing Play, but differs in that the move-source data will be deleted. [F4] TEMPLATE • In this display, you can select the parameters that will be copied. • The “ReceiveCh” set to the destination Part of the Song/Pattern varies depending on the destination Part. The settings are as follows. Parts 1 – 4: Channel 1 Parts 5 – 8: Channel 5 Parts 9 – 12: Channel 9 Parts 13 – 16: Channel 13 [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Mixing program to a computer or another MIDI device for data archiving. Press the [ENTER] button to execute Bulk Dump. NOTE In order to execute Bulk Dump, you will need to set the correct MIDI Device Number. For details, see page 148. [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 121 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Mixing Voice Edit In this mode, you can edit the Voices assigned to Mixing Parts 1 – 16 respectively and store them as Mixing Voices. The FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play Mixing Voice Edit settings are applied only to Normal Voices. When a Normal Voice is selected, the Voice Edit [F1] VOL/PAN parameters are divided into Common Edit (parameters common to all four Elements), and Element Edit (parameters of [F2] VOICE individual Elements). Mixing Voice Jobs are also available, providing convenient tools for organizing your created [F3] EF SEND Mixing Voices. This section explains each parameter in three types (Common Edit, Element Edit, and Mixing Voice Job). NOTE For more information about Mixing Voices, see page 7. Common Edit Operation [SONG]/[PATTERN] [MIXING] [F2] VOICE Normal Voice selection [F5] VCE ED [COMMON] [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 30). The Mixing Voice Edit parameters are basically the same as those in [F3] MEQ the Voice Edit mode. However, some parameters having the same name as those in Song Mixing/Pattern Mixing Part [F4] USB I/O Edit are not available in Mixing Voice Edit. [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT [F1] GENERAL Part Edit [F1] VOICE Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 30). Please note that the [F3] EQ display is not available in Mixing Voice [F2] OUTPUT Edit. [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW [F2] OUTPUT Mixing Job Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 31). [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] CTL SET (Controller Set) Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 32). [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit (page 33). [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F6] EFFECT [F1] OSC Same as in Normal Voice Common Edit. See page 35. However, please note that the [SF4] REVERB and [SF5] CHORUS [F2] PITCH displays are not available in Mixing Voice Edit. [F3] FILTER NOTE When selecting the Part for which the Insertion Effect switch is set to off, the [F6] EFFECT display is not available. [F4] AMP [F5] LFO Element Edit [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job Operation [SONG]/[PATTERN] [MIXING] [F2] VOICE Normal Voice selection [F5] VCE ED Element selection [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE [F1] OSC (Oscillator) Supplementary Information Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit (page 38). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 122 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Mixing Mode [F2] PITCH Mixing Play Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit (page 39). [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE [F3] EF SEND [F3] FILTER [F4] TEMPLATE Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit (page 41). [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit [F4] AMP (Amplitude) Common Edit Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit (page 43). [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX [F3] MEQ [F5] LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit (page 45). [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F6] EQ (Equalizer) [F2] OUTPUT Same as in Normal Voice Element Edit (page 46). [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Voice Job Mixing Job The Mixing Voice Job mode features two basic operations, Copy and Delete. After setting parameters as required in the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK [F2] RECALL (Edit Recall) Mixing Voice Edit If you are editing a Mixing Voice and select a different Mixing Voice, Mixing program, Song or Pattern without storing your edited one, all the edits you’ve made will be erased. Edits are also erased if the current Part to which the edited Mixing Voice is assigned receives a program change from an external MIDI instrument. If this happens, you can use Edit Recall to restore the Mixing Voice with your latest edits intact by pressing the [ENTER] button from the [F2] RECALL Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET display. NOTE Since a Recall Buffer for the Mixing Voice is prepared for each Part of the current Song or Pattern, you can specify the Part to which the Mixing Voice to be recalled is assigned before executing Edit Recall. [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F3] COPY [F2] PITCH This Job lets you copy the Mixing Voice stored to a specified Part in one Song/Pattern to a Part in another Song/Pattern. [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP Source Song and Part [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY Destination Song (current Song) and Part [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information [F5] DELETE This Job lets you delete a Mixing Voice assigned to a specified Song/Pattern’s Part. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 123 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Mixing Mode Supplementary Information Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN Editing a Performance by using the Knobs By using the knobs on the front panel, you can adjust various parameters such as pan, effect, cutoff frequency and [F2] VOICE [F3] EF SEND resonance for each Part (Track) of the Mixing. [F4] TEMPLATE 1 2 Press one of the Knob Function buttons (1 or 2) to call up the Control Function display. [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Select the Part you want to edit. Common Edit Press a number button corresponding to the Part number. 3 [F1] GENERAL Select the functions assigned to Knobs 1 – 4 or Knobs 5 – 8. [F2] MFX Each time Knob Function 1 button is pressed, the lamp lights alternatively in descending order, [TONE1] | [TONE2] [F3] MEQ | [TONE3]. The functions assigned to Knobs 1 – 4 will be switched according to the operation of Knob Function 1 [F4] USB I/O button. Each time Knob Function 2 button is pressed, the lamp lights alternatively in descending order, [EQ] | [F5] A/D IN [EFFECT] | [ARP]. The functions assigned to Knobs 5 – 8 will be switched according to the operation of Knob Function 2 button. When each lamp is turned on, the functions assigned to the Knobs are as follows. [F6] EFFECT Part Edit When the [TONE 1] lamp is turned on: Knob 1 CUTOFF [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF2] FILTER “Cutoff” Knob 2 RESONANCE [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF2] FILTER “Resonance” Knob 3 FEG DEPTH [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF2] FILTER “FEGDepth” Knob 4 [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F1] VOICE [SF4] PORTA “Time” PORTAMENTO [F1] VOICE page 118 [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job page 118 ATTACK [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Attack” Knob 2 DECAY [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Decay” Knob 3 SUSTAIN [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Sustain” Knob 4 RELEASE [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F4] TONE [SF4] AEG “Release” [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY When the [TONE 2] lamp is turned on: Knob 1 [F2] OUTPUT [F4] BULK page 119 Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT When the [TONE 3] lamp is turned on: Knob 1 VOLUME [SONG] Song selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] VOL/PAN “Volume” Knob 2 PAN [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F2] OUTPUT [SF1] VOL/PAN “Pan” Knob 3 ASSIGN 1 [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F1] VOICE [SF6] OTHER offset value to “Assign 1” function Knob 4 ASSIGN 2 Element Edit page 118 [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER page 118 LOW [F6] EQ [SONG] or [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F1] VOICE [SF6] OTHER offset value to “Assign 2” function [SONG] / [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F3] EQ “LOW GAIN” Knob 6 MID F [SONG] / [PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F3] EQ “MID FREQ” Knob 7 MID [SONG] /[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F3] EQ “MID GAIN” Knob 8 HIGH [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F3] EQ “HIGH GAIN” MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual [F4] AMP [F5] LFO Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL When the [EQ] lamp is turned on: Knob 5 [F1] OSC [F3] COPY page 118 [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information 124 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Mixing Mode When the [EFFECT] lamp is turned on: Knob 5 CHO PRESET [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F6] EFFECT [SF4] CHORUS “Preset” Knob 6 CHO SEND [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [F3] EF SEND “CHO SEND” Knob 7 REV PRESET [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [EDIT] [COMMON] [F6] EFFECT [SF4] CHORUS “Preset” Knob 8 REV SEND page 116 GATE TIME Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE [F3] EF SEND [F4] TEMPLATE [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [MIXING] [F3] EF SEND “REV SEND” [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit When the [ARP] lamp is turned on: Knob 5 FILE [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection ARP [EDIT] [F5] PLAY FX “GateTimeRate” in the first page page 83 Common Edit [F1] GENERAL Knob 6 OCT RANGE [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection ARP [EDIT] [F5] PLAY FX “OctaveRange” in the first page [F2] MFX Knob 7 UNITMULTIPLY [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection ARP [EDIT] [F5] PLAY FX “UnitMultiply” in the first page [F4] USB I/O Knob 8 TEMPO [SONG]/[PATTERN] Song/Pattern selection [F3] MEQ [F5] A/D IN (Tempo) [F6] EFFECT NOTE Holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the Knob Function 1 or 2 button will light the TONE1/EQ lamp. Part Edit [F1] VOICE Creating an Arpeggio [F2] OUTPUT In addition to using the preset Arpeggios, you can also create your own original Arpeggio data. First, record a Phrase to [F3] EQ a Song or Pattern Track. Then, use the appropriate Song or Pattern Job function to convert the data (MIDI sequence [F4] TONE data) to Arpeggio data. [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job 1 Record MIDI sequence data to a Song or Pattern. 2 Convert the MIDI sequence data (recorded to the Song or Pattern) to Arpeggio data. [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Song or Pattern Recording Arpeggio Track 1 Common Edit User Arpeggio 256 Track 2 [F2] OUTPUT Track 3 Recording User Arpeggio 001 Track 1 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 Track 14 Element Edit Track 4 Track 8 Track 10 [F6] EFFECT Track 3 Track 7 Track 9 [F5] LFO Track 2 Track 6 Recording [F4] CTL SET Track 4 Track 5 Recording [F1] GENERAL [F1] OSC Convert [F2] PITCH [SONG] [JOB] [F5] TRACK 07: Put Track To Arp After setting the parameters as shown below. press the [ENTER] button to execute Convert. Specify the destination Arpeggio number. Specify the source Song/Pattern number and measure range. Track 15 [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job Track 16 [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE You can record MIDI sequence data for the Arpeggio to any of the Tracks. After recording, select four Tracks from all sixteen and convert them to Arpeggio data. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual Set the root note when the convert type of any Track is set to “OrgNote.” Specify the category of the created Arpeggio. Select a convert type by Track. Supplementary Information Specify the Tracks of the source Song or Pattern. Set unused Tracks to “off.” 125 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Determining how Song/Pattern data is converted to an Arpeggio – Convert Type MIDI sequence data (of Song/Pattern Tracks) can be converted to Arpeggio data in one of three ways, according to the Convert types below. These types can also be selected independently for each destination Track—providing enormous flexibility and performance control. FILE Mixing Mode Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN [F2] VOICE Normal (Normal Arpeggio) The Arpeggio is played back using only the played note and its octave notes. Fixed Playing any note(s) will trigger the same MIDI sequence data. OrgNotes (Original Notes) Basically same as “Fixed” with the exception that the Arpeggio playback notes differ according to the played chord. [F3] EF SEND [F4] TEMPLATE [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Record the MIDI sequence data to a Song or Pattern Track, referring to the previous instructions in this chapter as needed. The examples listed below are used as reference. Mixing Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL • Creating a rhythm pattern (using a Drum Voice) [F2] MFX Track 1 Record a basic rhythm pattern using various drum instruments. Convert via “Fixed.” Track 2 – 4 Record a different rhythm pattern using a specific drum instrument to each Track. Convert via “Normal.” Record a bass line using a specific desired key (root). Track 2 – 4 [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN • Creating a bass line (using a Normal Voice) Track 1 [F3] MEQ Convert via “OrgNote” after the OrgNotes Root is set. off [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT Storing the Mixing settings as a Mixing Template A total of 32 Mixing settings, each designed for a different music category or genre, have been programmed and stored as convenient Mixing templates. Each Mixing Template includes the Voices, effects, pan and other settings suitable for the corresponding music genre. Simply dial up the template that comes closest to the type of Song or Pattern you wish [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job to create, tweak the settings as desired, then start recording. You can also store the Mixing settings you’ve created in [F1] INIT theMOX6/MOX8 as an original Mixing Template. [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Recalling Templates Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit 1 To enter Pattern Play, simply press the [SONG]/[PATTERN] button. 2 Press the [MIXING] button, then press the [F6] TEMPLATE button, and then press the [SF1] MIX button to call up the display for setting a Template. [F4] CTL SET Select the desired Template by using the [INC] and [DEC] buttons or the [DATA] dial. [F6] EFFECT 3 [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT After the Template is selected, press the [ENTER] button to load the relevant Mixing settings. [F5] LFO Element Edit [F1] OSC 4 Play the keyboard to check the Mixing settings. To select the desired Part, press the [TRACK] button (the lamp lights), then press the appropriate Number [1] – [16] button. [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO Storing the Mixing settings as a Mixing Template [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job 1 Press the [MIXING] button in the Song/Pattern mode, then set the Mixing settings. 2 Press the [STORE] button. [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY The Store display for the Song/Pattern mode appears. [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information NOTE Press the [STORE] button in the Mixing Voice Edit to store the Mixing Voice. To store the Mixing Templates, press the [STORE] button in the Song/Pattern mode, Mixing Play, Mixing Edit, or Mixing Job. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 126 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE 3 Press the [F2] TEMPLATE button. 4 Set the Template number and name. 5 Press the [ENTER] button. [F2] VOICE After the confirmation prompt appears, press the [ENTER] [F3] EF SEND Template number Mixing Play [F1] VOL/PAN button to store the new template. To cancel the operation, press the [EXIT] button. Mixing Mode [F4] TEMPLATE Template name [F5] VCE ED [F6] EFFECT Mixing Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] MFX [F3] MEQ [F4] USB I/O [F5] A/D IN [F6] EFFECT Part Edit [F1] VOICE [F2] OUTPUT [F3] EQ [F4] TONE [F5] RCV SW Mixing Job [F1] INIT [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F4] BULK Mixing Voice Edit Common Edit [F1] GENERAL [F2] OUTPUT [F4] CTL SET [F5] LFO [F6] EFFECT Element Edit [F1] OSC [F2] PITCH [F3] FILTER [F4] AMP [F5] LFO [F6] EQ Mixing Voice Job [F2] RECALL [F3] COPY [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 127 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Master Mode Master Mode Master Play This synthesizer is loaded with such a wealth of different features, functions and operations, you may find it difficult to locate and call up the particular feature you need. This is where the Master function comes in handy. The MOX6/MOX8 has space for a total of 128 of your own User Master settings. You can use it to memorize the operations you use most often in each mode, and call them up instantly anytime you need them with a single button press. [F1] PLAY [F2] MEMORY [F3] ZONE SW Master Edit Common Edit Master Play [F1] NAME To enter Master Play and call up the Master Play display, press the [MASTER] button from the current mode. Zone Edit [F1] TRANS Operation Press the [MASTER] button. [F2] NOTE [F3] TX SW [F4] PRESET [F1] PLAY [F5] KNOB Master Job 1 5 768 [F1] INIT [F4] BULK 2 3 4 1 Master Number (Group/Number) Indicates the selected Master number. 2 Main Category / Voice When the memorized mode is Voice or Performance, this indicates the Main Category and Sub Category of the Voice/ Performance. When the memorized mode is Song or Pattern, this indicates the Voice assigned to the currently selected Track. 3 Master Name Indicates the name of the current Master. 4 Mode Indicates the mode memorized to the current Master. One of the modes (VOICE, PERF, PATTERN, SONG) is indicated here. 5 Zone Switch Indicates the “ZoneSwitch” setting (page 129). 6 Current Part/ Current Track When the memorized mode is Performance, this indicates the currently selected part (Current Part) of the Performance. When the memorized mode is Song or a Pattern, this indicates the currently selected Track. When the memorized mode is Voice, there is no indication. 7 (Arpeggio Tempo) Indicates the Arpeggio Tempo set for the current Master. NOTE This parameter can be set also by holding the [SHIFT] button and pressing the [ENTER] button several times repeatedly at the desired tempo. This function is referred to as “Tap Tempo.” 8 OCT (Octave) Indicates the Keyboard Octave setting. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 128 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF1] ARP1 (Arpeggio 1) – [SF6] ARP6 (Arpeggio 6)/ [SF1] SCN1 (Scene 1) – [SF6] SCN6 (Scene 6) When the memorized mode is Voice, Performance, or Pattern, a different Arpeggio type is assigned to each of the [SF1] ARP1 – [SF6] ARP6 buttons according to the Voice/Performance/Pattern number. The Arpeggio types are assigned to the buttons with 8th note icons on the display tab. You can call them up by pressing these buttons any time during your keyboard performance. When the memorized mode is Song, a different Scene setting is assigned to each of the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons according to the Song number. You can call up the mute settings or solo settings for the Tracks by pressing these buttons any time during your keyboard performance. NOTE The Arpeggios can be registered in the Arpeggio Edit display. For detailed instructions on registering Scenes, see “Registering the Song Scene” on page 98. FILE Master Mode Master Play [F1] PLAY [F2] MEMORY [F3] ZONE SW Master Edit Common Edit [F1] NAME Zone Edit [F1] TRANS [F2] NOTE [F2] MEMORY [F3] TX SW [F4] PRESET Mode [F5] KNOB Determines the mode that is called up when the Master number is selected. Settings: Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern Memory Master Job [F1] INIT [F4] BULK Determines the Program number that is called up when the Master is selected. Settings: When the Mode is set to Voice: Select a Voice bank and number. When the Mode is set to Performance: Select a Performance bank and number. When the Mode is set to Song: Select a Song number. When the Mode is set to Pattern: Select a Pattern number. [F3] ZONE SW (Zone Switch) ZoneSwitch Determines whether the Zone function is used (on) or not (off). See page 130 for details about the Zone function. Settings: off, on NOTE When the Mode is set to “Voice” or “Performance” and the Zone Switch is turned on, only Zone 1 can be used in the default setting (playing Zones 2 – 4 will produce no sound). You can use these Zones by setting various parameters in the Master Edit mode. ZoneKnob When ZoneSwitch is set to “on,” this determines whether the Zone Edit settings are assigned to Knobs 1 – 8 (on), or the settings in the memorized mode are assigned to the Knobs 1 – 8 (off). Settings: off, on NOTE When ZoneSwitch is set to “on,” pressing Knob Function 1 and 2 buttons simultaneously can also set ZoneKnob to on/off. When this parameter is set to on, the LED indicators of the Knob Function 1 and 2 buttons are turned off. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 129 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Master Mode Master Edit The Master Edit mode lets you create your own original Master programs—containing up to four different Zones Master Play (keyboard areas)—by editing the various parameters. In the Master mode, you can divide the keyboard into (up to) four [F1] PLAY independent areas (called “Zones”). To each Zone can be assigned different MIDI channels and different functions of [F2] MEMORY the Knobs and Control Sliders. This makes it possible to control several Parts of the multi-timbral tone generator simultaneously by a single keyboard or to control Voices of an external MIDI instrument over several different channels in addition to the internal Voices of this synthesizer itself—letting you use the MOX6/MOX8 to effectively do the work of several keyboards. There are two types of Master Edit displays: those for editing parameters common to all four Zones and those for editing individual Zones. This section explains the parameters for Common Edit and Part Edit. [F3] ZONE SW Master Edit Common Edit [F1] NAME Zone Edit Common Edit [F1] TRANS [F2] NOTE Operation [MASTER] Master selection [EDIT] [COMMON] [F3] TX SW [F4] PRESET [F5] KNOB [F1] NAME Master Job [F1] INIT From this display you can create a name for the Master. For detailed instructions on naming, see the “Basic Operation” of the Owner’s Manual. [F4] BULK Zone Edit Operation [MASTER] Master selection [EDIT] Number [1] – [4] [F1] TRANS (Transmit) From this display you can set how each Zone transmits MIDI messages when you play the keyboard. TransCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI Transmit Channel for each Zone. Settings: 1 – 16 IntSw (Internal Switch) Determines whether or not MIDI data for each Zone is transmitted to the internal tone generator. Settings: off, on ExtSw (External Switch) Determines whether or not MIDI data for each Zone is transmitted to an external MIDI device. Settings: off, on [F2] NOTE From this display you can set the pitch- and keyboard-related parameters for each zone. Octave Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. You can adjust the offset up or down over a maximum range of three octaves. Settings: -3 – +0 (Default) – +3 Transpose Determines the amount in semitones by which the range of the Zone is shifted up or down. Settings: -11 – +0 (Default) – +11 NoteLimitH, L (Note Limit High, Low) Determines the lowest and highest notes of the range for each Zone. The selected Zone will sound only when you play notes within this range. Settings: C -2 – G8 NOTE You can also set the note directly from the keyboard, by holding down the [SF6] KBD button and pressing the desired key. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 130 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F3] TX SW (Transmit Switch) FILE Master Mode Master Play From this display you can set how each individual zone affects transmission of various MIDI data, such as Control [F1] PLAY Change and Program Change messages. When the relevant parameter is set to “on,” playing the selected zone will [F2] MEMORY transmit the corresponding MIDI data. Note that two different display types listed below are available and you can switch between them by pressing the [SF6] button. Each display type features the same settings in a different format; use the type you feel most comfortable with. • Display showing four Zones • Display showing all parameters for one Zone Settings: See below. Bank (TG) ................................ Determines whether or not to transmit Bank Select MSB/LSB messages to the internal tone generator. PC (TG).................................... Determines whether or not to transmit Program Change messages to the internal tone generator. Bank (MIDI) ............................. Determines whether or not to transmit Bank Select MSB/LSB messages to the internal tone generator. PC (MIDI)................................. Determines whether or not to transmit Program Change messages to the external tone generator via MIDI. PB (Pitch Bend) ....................... Determines whether or not to transmit Pitch Bend messages to the internal and external tone generator. MW (Modulation Wheel) .......... Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Modulation Wheel to the internal and external tone generator. FC1 (Foot Controller 1) ............ Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the optional Foot Controller to the internal and external tone generator. Sus (Sustain) ........................... Determines whether or not to transmit Control Number 64 (Sustain) messages to the internal and external tone generator. This parameter is not available for the Drum Voice Parts. FS (Foot Switch) ...................... Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the Footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack to the internal and external tone generator. Knob ........................................ Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by using the Knobs to the internal and external tone generator. A.Func1 (Assignable Function 1) /A.Func2 (Assignable Function 2) ................................................. Determines whether or not to transmit MIDI messages generated by pressing the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1] and [2] buttons to the internal tone generator. Vol/Exp (Volume/Expression)... Determines whether or not to transmit volume messages to the internal and external tone generator. Pan .......................................... Determines whether or not to transmit Pan messages to the internal and external tone generator. [F3] ZONE SW Master Edit Common Edit [F1] NAME Zone Edit [F1] TRANS [F2] NOTE [F3] TX SW [F4] PRESET [F5] KNOB Master Job [F1] INIT [F4] BULK [F4] PRESET From this display you can make Voice-related settings for each Zone in the selected Master program number. NOTE By using the [F6] SEND button, you can select whether the settings in PRESET display are immediately applied or not. If the [F6] SEND button is turned on ( ), the relevant MIDI messages will be output from the MOX6/MOX8 as soon as you change each parameter in this display. If the [F6] SEND button is turned off ( ), the MIDI messages will be output from the MOX6/MOX8 after you store the edited Master and then select the Master again. However, the parameters set to off in the [F1]TRANS or [F3]TX SW display cannot be output. BankMSB (Bank Select MSB) BankLSB (Bank Select LSB) PgmChange (Program Change) Determines the Voice assignment for each Zone in the selected Master. Settings: See the “Voice List” in the “Data List” PDF document. Volume Determines the output level of the Voice in each Zone. Settings: 0 – 127 Pan Determines the stereo pan position of the Voice in each Zone. Settings: L64 (far left) – C (center) – R63 (far right) MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 131 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Master Mode [F5] KNOB Master Play [F1] PLAY CtrlKnobUp (Control Knob Upper) CtrlKnobLo (Control Knob Lower) [F2] MEMORY From this display you can determine which Control Change numbers are used for the Knobs for each Zone. These settings are available only when the “ZoneKnob” parameter (in the [F3] ZONE SW display in Master Play) is set to “on.” Settings: off, 1 – 95 [F3] ZONE SW Master Edit Common Edit [F1] NAME Master Job Zone Edit The Voice Job mode features several basic operations, such as Initialize and Copy. After setting parameters as required in the selected display, press the [ENTER] button to execute the Job. [F1] TRANS [F2] NOTE [F3] TX SW [F4] PRESET [F1] INIT (Initialize) [F5] KNOB This function lets you reset (initialize) all Master parameters to their default settings. It also allows you to selectively initialize certain parameters, such as Common settings, settings for each Zone, and so on—very useful when creating a completely new Master from scratch. Master Job [F1] INIT [F4] BULK Type of parameter to be initialized: All, Common, Zone All All settings for the selected Master are initialized. Common Common parameter settings for the selected Master are initialized. Zone The Zone settings are initialized. You can initialize the zone setting to one of the following three types. Split Splits the keyboard range using Zone 1 and Zone 2. “UpperCh” determines the MIDI transmit channel of the upper range of the keyboard, “LowerCh” determines the MIDI transmit channel of the lower range of the keyboard, and “SplitPoint” determines the note (C2 – G8) number which separates the upper range and lower ranges of the keyboard. 4Zone Initializes all four Zones. Layer Lets you layer two parts using Zone 1 and Zone 2. “UpperCh” and “LowerCh” determine the MIDI transmit channels of the two Zones respectively. [F4] BULK (Bulk Dump) This function lets you send all your edited parameter settings for the currently selected Master to a computer or another MIDI device for data archiving. Press the [ENTER] button to execute the Bulk Dump. NOTE In order to execute Bulk Dump, you will need to set the correct MIDI Device Number, with the following operation: [UTILITY] [F6] MIDI [SF1] CH “DeviceNo.” MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 132 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Remote Mode Remote Mode Remote display In the Remote mode, you can use the Knobs and buttons of this instrument to control the sequencer Tracks and mixer channels of the DAW software on the computer. For example, you can start/stop playback of the DAW software on the Remote Control Assignments computer by using the Function buttons and control the song position on the DAW software by using the [DATA] dial, [INC] and [DEC] buttons instead of using the mouse or keyboard of the computer. The DAW applications Cubase, Logic, SONAR and Digital Performer can be controlled by the MOX6/MOX8 in the Remote mode. The Remote settings are made in “Remote Select” in the REMOTE display of the Utility mode. Operation Press the [DAW REMOTE]. NOTE To leave the Remote mode, press the [DAW REMOTE] button again. NOTE For the version of the DAW software which is compatible with the MOX6/MOX8, see the “Specifications” section in the Owner’s Manual. Remote display 6 2 3 4 1 1 TrackName When the DAW software which is set in the “DAW Select” of the Utility mode is set to Cubase, this indicates the current Track in Cubase. 2 Control Template Number, Template Name The MOX6/MOX8 provides 50 Control Templates which can be used for various VSTi plug-ins. By selecting the desired one from 50 Control Templates, you can assign the functions appropriate for the current VSTi to Knobs 1 – 4. This parameter determines the Control Template number. NOTE Use the MOX6/MOX8 Remote Editor for editing the Control Template. The MOX6/MOX8 Remote Editor can be downloaded from the following website address: http://www.yamahasynth.com/jp/downloads/ For instructions, see the PDF manual included with the MOX6/MOX8 Remote Editor. NOTE When the DAW software which is set in the Utility mode is set to Cubase, switching the VSTi on the Cubase changes the Control Template set in the MOX6/MOX8 consecutively. When the DAW software which is set in the Utility mode is set to something other than Cubase, switching the VSTi on the DAW software does not affect the Control Template set in the MOX6/MOX8. You should set the appropriate Control Template manually to match the VSTi on the DAW software. 3 Parameter Name Shows the parameters which can be changed via Knobs 1 – 4 on the panel. The displayed parameters are the last four parameters that have been operated via Knobs 1 – 4 and Knobs 5 – 8. 4 Function Names Indicates the names of Cubase functions assigned to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. 5 Parameter Values of the Knob Output Select in each Template Indicates the parameter values of the Knob Output Select set in the Remote Template. The Knob Output Select of the Remote Template can be set with the MOX6/MOX8 Remote Editor. In the following conditions, the setting of the Knob Out Select parameter will automatically be shown as “CC.” • The DAW software which is set in the Utility mode is set to something other than Cubase. • The “MIDI In/Out” parameter (page 150) is set to “MIDI.” • The USB cable is not connected to the MOX6/MOX8. 6 Name of the Remote Control Software Indicates the name of the DAW software which is set in “DAW Select” of the Utility mode (page 142). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 133 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Remote Mode Remote Control Assignments Remote display Switching the Control Template for the VSTi Remote Control Assignments To switch the Control Templates of the MOX6/MOX8, use the BANK SELECT [DEC]/[INC] buttons. Switching the functions of Knobs 1 – 4 Press the Knob Function 1 button to switch the functions assigned to the Knobs 1 – 4 in descending order, “1” | “2” | “3.” Each function differs depending on the selected Control Template. For details, confirm on the MOX6/MOX8 Remote Editor. The relevant lamp of the functions assigned to the Knobs is turned on. When the functions are shown in the display, the lamp flashes. NOTE Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press Knob Function 1 button to set the functions of Knobs 1 – 4 to “1.” NOTE Use the MOX6/MOX8 Remote Editor to edit the Control Template. Switching the functions of Knobs 5 – 8 Knobs 5 – 8 are available only when “DAW Select” is set to “Cubase” in the Utility mode. Press Knob Function 2 button to switch the functions assigned to the Knobs 5 – 8 in descending order, “Q” | “F” | “G.” Knobs 5 – 8 also control the Low, Low Mid, High Mid, and High bands. This operation is linked with the Track EQ parameter in Cubase. The relevant lamp of the functions assigned to the Knobs is turned on. When the functions are shown in the display, the lamp flashes. NOTE Hold down the [SHIFT] button and press Knob Function 2 button to set the functions of Knobs 5 – 8 to “Q.” Transport operation The SEQ TRANSPORT buttons also function as DAW transport controls. 1 2 3 4 5 6 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 1 2 3 4 5 6 Top (Move to the top of the Song) Rewind Forward Record Stop Play 134 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Remote Mode Operating by the Function buttons The functions of the DAW software can be operated by the Function buttons and Sub Function buttons. When “DAW Remote display Select” is set to “Cubase,” the appropriate functions of Cubase are assigned to the buttons. This section explains about Remote Control Assignments the specific functions for the Function buttons when “DAW Select” is set to “Cubase.” NOTE When “DAW Select” is set to something other than Cubase, the functions assigned to the Function buttons may not be appropriate. Before using the Function buttons, assign desired functions to the Function buttons on the DAW software. Please note that these buttons don’t work when “DAW Select” is set to Digital Performer. Functions for the Function buttons When “DAW Select” is set to “Cubase,” the following fixed functions are assigned to the [F1] – [F6] buttons. Buttons F1 Panel Indication Functions ADD INST TRACK Opens/closes the [Add Instrument Track] dialog. F2 VSTi WINDOW Opens/closes the VSTi display for the selected Track. F3 EDIT CH SET Opens/closes the settings window for the channel of the selected Track. F4 AUTOMATION READ Switches Automation Read for the selected Track on or off. F5 AUTOMATION WRITE Switches Automation Write for the selected Track on or off. F6 DELETE Delete When selecting multiple Tracks, please keep in mind the following points: • [F2] function is for the top Track. • [F3] function is only for the top Track. • [F4]/[F5]/[F6] functions are for all selected Tracks. Functions for the Sub Function buttons The [SF1] – [SF6] buttons can be assigned freely to any desired function. When “DAW Select” is set to “Cubase,” you can use six memories to which functions assigned to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons are registered. You can register the functions for the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons to each memory. To switch among Memory settings 1 – 6, use the [A] – [F] buttons on the MOX6/MOX8 panel. The following functions are registered as the default settings to Memory settings 1 – 5. The functions assigned to the Sub Function buttons can be edited in the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window in Cubase (page 137). Memory 1 – Project Setup Buttons Categories Functions Display Indication SF1 Zoom Zoom In HZoom+ SF2 Zoom Zoom Out HZoom- SF3 Zoom Zoom In Vertically VZoom+ SF4 Zoom Zoom Out Vertically VZoom- SF5 Devices Mixer Mixer SF6 MOX6/MOX8 MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup Setup MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 135 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE Categories QUICK SET FILE Remote Mode Memory 2 – Project Window Buttons UTILITY Functions Display Indication SF1 Edit Open Key Editor KeyEd SF2 SF3 Edit Open Score Editor Score Edit Open Drum Editor Drum SF4 Edit Open List Editor List SF5 Devices Mixer Mixer SF6 Project Open Pool OpenPl Remote display Remote Control Assignments Memory 3 – MIDI Buttons Categories Functions Display Indication SF1 AddTrack MIDI AdMidi SF2 MIDI Quantize Auto Quantize On/Off AutoQ SF3 MIDI Quantize Qtz SF4 MIDI Quantize Lengths QtzLng SF5 MIDI Toggle Step Input Step SF6 MIDI Quantize Setup QtzSet Memory 4 – Audio Buttons Categories Functions Display Indication SF1 AddTrack Audio SF2 AddTrack Audio Mono AdAudi AdMono SF3 Edit Monitor Monit SF4 Edit Select Next Grid Type NextGr SF5 File Import Audio File ImpAud SF6 Project Open Pool OpenPl Memory 5 – Mix Buttons SF1 Categories Functions Display Indication Automation Show Used Automation (Selected Tracks) ShowAt SF2 Automation Show All Used Automation ShwAUA SF3 Automation Hide All Automation HidAAu SF4 File Export Audio Mixdown MixDn SF5 Devices Mixer Mixer SF6 File Save New Version NewVer MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 136 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Remote Mode MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window Remote display The functions can be assigned to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons in the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window shown in Remote Control Assignments Cubase. This section explains about the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window. Startup Method Select the “Device” menu, then select the “MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup” in Cubase. Indicates the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window. NOTE When the default settings of the Memory 1 are assigned to the Function buttons, you can also start the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window by pressing the [SF6] button on the MOX6/MOX8 panel. About the settings for the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window The MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window contains the SF Assign window, SF Assign (Quick) window, and Option window. Pressing the tabs switches among the three windows. SF Assign window This window assigned the functions to selected one of the Sub Function buttons. You can select one of the Sub Function buttons by clicking the [SF1] – [SF6] button on the window. 9 ) 1 2 5 3 6 4 7 8 ! 1 [SF Assign] tab, [SF Assign (Quick)] tab, [Option] tab Click one of the tabs to switch windows. 2 Button Indicates the selected button for editing. 3 Category Selects the category for the functions assigned to the selected button. 4 Command Selects the function contained in the selected category. 5 Show As Determines the display indication of the selected function. The display indication can be up to six characters in length. 6 [SF1] – [SF6] buttons These buttons correspond to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons on the MOX6/MOX8 panel. Determines which button is to be assigned and used for the selected Set. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 137 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET 7 Buttons for the Memory 1 – 6 Determines which Memory is assigned to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. 8 Memory name FILE Remote Mode Remote display Remote Control Assignments Determines the name for the Memory specified by parameter (7) above; maximum 16 characters in length. 9 Load Loads the file to which the settings of the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window are stored. ) Save Settings other than the Option window in the MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window are stored as a file. ! Reset Memory 1/2/3/4/5/6 Clicking these buttons restores the default settings of the selected Memory to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. NOTICE Restoring the default data by clicking the Reset Memory button overwrites the registered functions for the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons to the selected Memory. SF Assign (Quick) window This window assigns functions to the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. The setting menu is the same as the SF Assign window. In SF Assign (Quick) window, you can assign the functions with the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons shown on the window. Option window This window determines the following settings. • Determines whether the dialog for the Audio Driver settings is shown or not when starting Cubase. • When moving the project cursor of the Cubase by operating the jog dial, this determines whether the cursor stops immediately when jog operation is stopped (on), or slows down gradually before stopping (off). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 138 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Remote Mode Mute/Solo You can mute or solo the currently selected Track in Cubase by Remote display pressing the respective [MUTE]/[SOLO] button on the MOX6/MOX8. Remote Control Assignments Moving the cursor/ Program Change function The cursor [<]/[u]/[d]/[>] buttons work as cursor controls on the DAW software. The [EXIT] button works as the key on a computer, while the [ENTER] button works as the key. The [INC]/[DEC] buttons switch the VSTi program on the DAW software. However, when “Remote Select” is set to “Cubase,” the functions of the [INC]/[DEC] buttons differ depending on the “ProgramChangeMode” setting of the MOX6/MOX8. “ProgramChangeMode” setting Functions remote Pressing the [INC] button selects the next program, while pressing the [DEC] button selects the previous program. PC Allows you to select the program corresponding to the specified number by using the [INC] /[DEC] buttons. When specifying a program number outside the actual range of programs, the program will not be changed. When using the VST3, pressing the [INC]/[DEC] buttons cannot change the program. auto When the selected Track is a MIDI Track, and the output destination of the MIDI Track is not VSTi, the [INC]/[DEC] function is same as when “ProgramChangeMode” is set to “PC.” In other cases, the [INC]/[DEC] function is same as when “ProgramChangeMode” is set to “remote.” When the “DAW Select” is set to something other than “Cubase,” the “ProgramChangeMode” is always set to “PC.” Inputting a Number Directly The number [1] – [9] buttons work as the numeric keys 1 – 9 in Cubase. The number [10] works as the numeric key 0 on Cubase. The number [14] works as the numeric key “.”, the number [15] works as the numeric key “-”, and the number [16] works as the numeric key “+”. You can use these number buttons when inputting a parameter number directly or switching the tool functions in Cubase. AI KNOB functions The [DATA] dial of the MOX6/MOX8 works as the AI KNOB. The AI KNOB can control a desired parameter within the principal window and plug-in software in Cubase, specified via the mouse pointer (as long as the [LOCK] button and [JOG] button are turned off). The [CATEGORY SEARCH] button works as the [JOG] button, and the [FAVORITE] button works as the [LOCK] button. The parameters which are available for control by AI KNOB will differ according to the on/off status of the [JOG] button and [LOCK] button as follows. [JOG] button [LOCK] button AI KNOB functions off off Operates the parameter specified via the mouse pointer in Cubase. off on When you locate the mouse pointer to the desired parameter then turn the [LOCK] button on, the AI KNOB will control the “locked” parameter regardless of the mouse pointer's position. on off Moves the time position of the current project. The MOX6/MOX8 Extension Setup window (page 137) determines whether the cursor stops immediately when jog operation is stopped (on), or slows down gradually before stopping (off). on on Moves the time position of the current project. Moving of the time position will not stop even if you stop operating the AI KNOB. You can stop playback at any time by pressing the [J] (Stop) button. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 139 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Utility settings FILE Remote Mode Press the [UTILITY] button to call up the display for the Utility settings dedicated to the Remote mode. See page 142 for Remote display details about the each parameter. Remote Control Assignments MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 140 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Utility Mode FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL In the Utility mode, you can set parameters that apply to the entire system of the MOX6/MOX8. This mode is actually a sub-mode of the Voice/Performance/Song/Pattern mode. Press the [UTILITY] button in each mode to enter the Utility mode and press the [EXIT] button after making settings to go back to the previous mode. [F2] VOICE [F2] SEQ [F3] VCE A/D Operation Press the [UTILITY] button. [F4] CTL ASN [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI [F1] GENERAL Utility Job [SF1] TG (Tone Generator) From this section, you can make overall settings for the internal tone generator. The settings here only affect the internal tone generator block. The MIDI output will not be affected. Volume Determines the overall volume of the instrument. Settings: 0 – 127 NoteShift Determines the amount (in semitones) by which the pitch of all notes is shifted. Settings: -24 – +0 – +24 Tune Determines the fine tuning of the MOX6/MOX8’s overall sound (in 0.1 cent steps). Settings: -102.4 – +0.0 – +102.3 SystemFxOn/OffBtn Chorus (System Effect On/Off Button Chorus) Turns the Chorus Effect on/off. Settings: off, on SystemFxOn/OffBtn Reverb (System Effect On/Off Button Reverb) Turns the Reverb Effect on/off. Settings: off, on [SF2] OUTPUT L&R Gain Determines the output gain of the OUTPUT [L/MONO] and [R] jacks. Settings: 0dB, +6dB USB 1/2 Gain USB 3/4 Gain Determines the output gain of the USB 1/2 channels or USB 3/4 channels. Settings: 0dB, +6dB [SF3] KBD (Keyboard) From this display you can set the keyboard-related parameters. The settings here affect the MIDI messages generated by playing the keyboard. Octave Determines the amount in octaves by which the range of the keyboard is shifted up or down. This parameter is linked with the OCTAVE [-]/[+] buttons on the panel. Settings: -3 – +0 – +3 Transpose This parameter is used to transpose the current zone in units of one semitone. Settings: -11 – +0 – +11 NOTE If you transpose beyond the note range limits (C -2 and G8), notes in the adjacent octaves will be used. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 141 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET VelCurve (Velocity Curve) These five curves determine how the actual velocity will be generated and transmitted according to the velocity (strength) with which you play notes on the keyboard. The graph shown in the display indicates the velocity response FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL curve. (The horizontal line represents the received velocity values (strength of your playing), while the vertical line [F2] VOICE represents the actual velocity values transmitted to the internal/external tone generators.) [F2] SEQ Settings: norm, soft, hard, wide, fixed [F3] VCE A/D norm (normal).... This linear “curve” produces one-to-one correspondence between the strength of your keyboard playing (velocity) and the actual sound change. soft..................... This curve provides increased response, especially for lower velocities. hard ................... This curve provides increased response, especially for higher velocities. wide ................... This curve accentuates your playing strength by producing lower velocities in response to softer playing and louder velocities in response to harder playing. As such, you can use this setting to expand your dynamic range. fixed................... This setting produces the same amount of sound change (set in Fixed Velocity below), no matter what your playing strength. The velocity of the notes you play are fixed at the value set here. [F4] CTL ASN [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI Utility Job FixedVelocity The Fixed curve can be used to send a fixed velocity to the tone generator regardless of how hard or soft you play the keyboard. This parameter is only available if you select the “fixed” Velocity Curve above. Settings: 1 – 127 [SF4] PERF CRE (Performance Creator) This display determines the parameters related to the Performance Creator which uses the [LAYER]/[SPLIT]/[DRUM ASSIGN] buttons. Layer Bank (Layer Voice Bank), Layer Number (Layer Voice Number) Determines the Voice assigned first when using the Layer function of the Performance Creator. Select the desired Voice by setting the Bank and Number. The Name is determined automatically. Split Bank (Split Voice Bank), Split Number (Split Voice Number) Determines the Voice assigned first when using the Split function of the Performance Creator. Select the desired Voice by setting the Bank and Number. The Name is determined automatically. Split Lower/Upper Determines the keyboard area to which the first Voice is assigned when executing the Split function of the Performance Creator. When “both” is selected, the first Voice is assigned to all the notes on the keyboard. When “lower” is selected, the first Voice is assigned to the area lower than the Split Point. When “upper” is selected, the first Voice is assigned to the Split Point and higher. Settings: both, lower, upper DrumAssign Bank (Drum Assign Voice Bank), Number (Drum Assign Voice Number) Determines the Voice assigned first when using the Drum Assign function of the Performance Creator. Select the desired Voice by setting the Bank and Number. The Name is determined automatically. ConfirmPopup If executing the Performance Creator with the Edit Indicator (E) shown in the Voice mode, the edited data will be lost. This parameter determines whether or not the confirmation prompt appears before executing the Performance Creator. Settings: off, on [SF5] REMOTE This section enables you to set the locate points. When pressing the [UTILITY] button in the Remote mode, only this REMOTE display is shown. DAW Select Determines the DAW software to be controlled by the MOX6/MOX8. Simply selecting a DAW type calls up the appropriate Remote settings automatically. Settings: Cubase, LogicPro, DigiPerf, SONAR MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 142 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET ProgChangeMode (Program Change Mode) Determines what messages will be transmitted to the computer when you operate the [INC]/[DEC] buttons or [DATA] dial. When “PC” is selected, Program Change messages will be transmitted via MIDI Port 1. When “remote” is selected, FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL Remote Control messages will be transmitted via MIDI Port 2. When “auto” is selected, this automatically switches [F2] VOICE whether Program Change messages will be transmitted via MIDI Port 1 or Remote Control messages will be transmitted [F2] SEQ via MIDI Port 2 according to the DAW software controlled in the Remote mode. The Remote Control messages can be [F3] VCE A/D transmitted only when the VSTi in Cubase is controlled in the Remote mode. [F4] CTL ASN Settings: auto, PC, remote NOTE This parameter is fixed to “PC” when the “DAW Select” is set to something other than “Cubase.” [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI [SF6] OTHER Utility Job Mic/Line When using the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks, this determines the input source, microphone (mic) or line. Settings: mic, line mic..................... Intended for low output equipment, such as a microphone, electric guitar or bass. line ..................... Intended for high output equipment, such as a keyboard, synthesizer, or CD player. CtrlReset (Controller Reset) Determines the status of the controllers (Modulation Wheel, Aftertouch, Foot Controller, Breath Controller, Knobs, etc.) when switching between Voices. When this is set to “hold,” the controllers are kept at the current setting. When this is set to “reset,” the controllers are reset to the default states (below). Settings: hold, reset If you select “reset,” the controllers will be reset to the following states/positions: Pitch Bend Center Modulation Wheel Minimum Aftertouch Minimum Foot Controller Maximum Footswitch Off Ribbon Controller Center Breath Controller Maximum Assignable Function Off Expression Maximum PowerOnMode This determines the default power-on mode (and memory bank) — letting you select which condition is automatically called up when you turn the power on. Settings: multi, voice (USR1), voice (PRE1), voice (GM), master Knob FuncDispSw (Knob Function Display Switch) Determines whether the KNOB FUNCTION pop-up window appears or not when pressing the Knob Function buttons. The KNOB FUNCTION pop-up window indicates the functions assigned to Knobs and their values. Settings: off, on KNOB FUNCTION pop-up window appears when pressing the Knob Function buttons Knob DispTime (Knob Display Time) Determines whether or not the KNOB FUNCTION pop-up window appears when operating the Knobs, and how long the popup will continue to be shown. Settings: off, 1 sec, 1.5 sec, 2 sec, 3 sec, 4 sec, 5 sec, keep off....................... When this selected, the popup is not called up even if you operate the Knobs. 1 sec – 5 sec ..... Turning the Knob will cause the popup to appear after an elapsed time of between 1 – 5 seconds, and then automatically close. keep................... Operating the Knob will cause the popup to be shown continuously until you call up a different display/dialog/ popup or press the [ENTER]/[EXIT] button. KNOB FUNCTION pop-up window appears when operating the Knobs MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 143 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Knob Curve Adjusts the touch response sensitivity in five steps. Larger values provide higher sensitivity, letting you make large changes to the actual value even with slight turning of the Knob. Settings: table1 – table5 LCD Mode Switches the backlight of the LCD. Settings: normal, reverse LCD Contrast Adjusts the LCD contrast. Settings: 1 – 16 FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL [F2] VOICE [F2] SEQ [F3] VCE A/D [F4] CTL ASN [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI Utility Job [F2] VOICE These special Voice-related settings are available only when entering the Utility mode from the Voice mode, letting you set parameters related to all the Voices. [SF1] MFX (Master Effect) From this display you can set the Master Effect related parameters applied to all the Voices. Details on each parameter are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 60. [SF2] MEQ (Master EQ) From this display you can apply five-band equalization (LOW, LOW MID, MID, HIGH MID, HIGH) to all Voices. Details on each parameter are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 61. [SF3] ARP CH (Arpeggio Channel) MIDIOutSwitch (MIDI Output Switch) This enables or disables MIDI data output for the Arpeggio function. When this is set to “on,” Arpeggio data is sent via MIDI in the Voice mode. Settings: off, on TransmitCh (Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI channel through which Arpeggio playback data will be sent (when Output Switch above is on). Settings: 1 – 16 [F2] SEQ (Sequencer) These special Song- and Pattern-related settings are available only when entering the Utility mode from the Song or Pattern mode. [SF1] CLICK From this display you can set the parameters related to the click sound (metronome) that is used during recording or playback in the Song/Pattern mode. Mode Determines whether the metronome click will sound or not, and under what conditions. Settings: off, rec, rec/play, all off....................... The click will not sound. rec ..................... The click will sound during Song/Pattern recording only. rec/play.............. The click will sound during Song/Pattern recording and playback. all ....................... The click will always sound. Beat Determines on which beats the metronome click will sound. Settings: 6 (16th notes), 08 (8th notes), 04 (quarter notes), 02 (half notes), 01 (whole notes) MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 144 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Volume Determines the click sound volume. Settings: 0 – 127 FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL [F2] VOICE Type [F2] SEQ Determines the click sound type. Settings: 1 – 10 [F3] VCE A/D [F4] CTL ASN RecCount (Record Count) Determines the number of count-in measures provided before recording actually starts after pressing the [R] (Play) button in the Record standby mode. Settings: off (Recording starts as soon as the [R] (Play) button is pressed), 1 meas – 8 meas [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI Utility Job NOTE Since the click sound is created with the internal tone generator, using click playback affects the overall polyphony of the instrument. [SF2] FILTER (MIDI Filter) From this display you can set which MIDI events will be recognized/transmitted via MIDI. The settings made here apply only to Song/Pattern playback data; they do not affect the MIDI events generated by your keyboard playing or panel operations in the Voice and Performance modes. MIDI events to which the Filter is applied: Note, PgmChange (Program Change), CtrlChange (Control Change), PB (Pitch Bend), ChAt (Channel Aftertouch), PolyAT (Polyphonic Aftertouch), Exclusive [SF3] OTHER PtnQuantize (Pattern Quantize) Determines the quantize value for Pattern switching during playback. Settings: 1 (1 measure), 1/2 (Half note), 1/4 (Quarter note), 1/8 (8th note), 1/16 (16th note) PtnTempoHold (Pattern Tempo Hold) Determines whether or not the tempo setting will switch to the tempo value stored with each Pattern when a new Pattern is selected during playback. When set to “on,” the tempo will be retained when Patterns are switched. When set to “off,” the tempo will switch to that stored with the new Pattern when Patterns are switched. Settings: off, on NOTE The tempo setting data in the Pattern Chain is not affected by this parameter. SongEventChase Event Chase allows you to specify which non-note data types are properly recognized during fast-forward and rewind operations. Setting this to a specific event ensures the playback integrity of the event, even when fast forwarding or rewinding. Settings: Off, PC (Program Change), PC+PB+Ctrl (Program Change + Pitch Bend + Control Change), all (All events) NOTE Keep in mind that settings other than “off” may result in slower operation—for example, a pause before starting playback, or slower rewind/fast forward speed. NOTE When this is set to “all,” an excessive amount of MIDI data may be generated, possibly resulting in a MIDI error on the connected device. LoadMix Determines whether the Mixing settings are loaded (on) or not (off) when the Song/Pattern number is changed. Settings: off, on NOTE This setting affects the Song/Pattern changes during Song/Pattern chain playback. [SF6] MEMORY Indicates the remaining free (available) memory for the Sequencer. [F3] VCE A/D (Voice A/D Input) You can set parameters related to the audio input signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks in the Voice mode. Details on each parameter are the same as in Performance Common Edit. See page 62. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 145 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [F4] CTL ASN (Controller Assign) FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL [SF1] ASSIGN [F2] VOICE [F2] SEQ Determines Controller Assign settings common to the entire system of the MOX6/MOX8. You can assign MIDI Control [F3] VCE A/D Change Numbers to the Knobs on the front panel and the external controllers. For example, you could use the ASSIGN [F4] CTL ASN 1 and 2 knobs to control effect depth for two different effects, while using the Foot Controller to control modulation. These Control Change Number assignments are known as “Controller Assign.” BC (Breath Controller Control Number) [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI Utility Job Determines the Control Change number generated when you use a Breath Controller on an external device connected to the MOX6/MOX8. Settings: off, 1 – 95 RB (Ribbon Controller Control Number) Determines the Control Change number corresponding to a Ribbon Controller on an external device connected to the MOX6/MOX8. Settings: off, 1 – 95 FC1 (Foot Controller 1 Control Number) Determines the Control Change number generated when you use the Foot Controller connected to the [FOOT CONTROLLER] jack. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages as if the Foot Controller of the instrument itself was used. Settings: off, 1 – 95 FC2 (Foot Controller 2 Control Number) Determines the Control Change number corresponding to a Foot Controller 2 on an external device connected to the MOX6/MOX8. Settings: off, 1 – 95 AS1 (Assignable 1 Control Number) AS2 (Assignable 2 Control Number) Determines the Control Change number generated when you use the ASSIGN 1/2 knobs. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages as if the ASSIGN 1/2 knobs of the instrument itself was used. Settings: off, 1 – 95 AF1 (Assign Function 1 Control Number) AF2 (Assign Function 2 Control Number) Determines the Control Change number generated when you use the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1]/[2] buttons. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages as if the ASSIGNABLE FUNCTION [1]/[2] buttons of the instrument itself was used. Settings: off, 1 – 95 [SF2] FT SW (Foot Switch) From this display you can determine the Control Change number generated by using the Footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH jack. FS (Foot Switch Control Number) From this display you can determine the Control Change number generated by using the Footswitch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [ASSIGNABLE] jack. Keep in mind that if the same MIDI Control Change messages as set here are received from an external device, the internal tone generator also responds to those messages as if the Footswitch of the instrument itself was used. Settings: off, 1 – 95, arp sw, play/stop, PC inc, PC dec, octave reset MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 146 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET SustainPedal (Foot Switch Sustain Pedal Select) Determines which model of an optional Foot Switch connected to the FOOT SWITCH [SUSTAIN] jack is recognized. When the FC3 is used: When you connect an optional FC3 (equipped with the half-damper feature) for producing the special “halfdamper” effect (as on a real acoustic piano), set this parameter to “FC3 (Half on).” If you don’t need the halfdamper feature or want to disable it while still using an FC3, set this parameter to “FC3 (Half off).” FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL [F2] VOICE [F2] SEQ [F3] VCE A/D When the FC4 or FC5 is used: [F4] CTL ASN Select “FC4/5.” The FC4 and FC5 are not equipped with the half-damper feature. [F5] USB I/O Settings: FC3 (Half on), FC3 (Half off), FC4/5 NOTE Note that this setting is not necessary when controlling the half-damper feature via Control Change messages from an external MIDI device to the instrument. [F6] MIDI Utility Job [F5] USB I/O Mode Determines the audio input/output connections. The following three settings are available. Settings: VST, 2StereoRec, 1StereoRec VST .................... The audio signal from A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks is output to the “USB 1/2” channels of the USB TO [HOST] jack. Also, the audio signal from the tone generator is output to the “USB 3/4” channels of the USB TO [HOST] jack. This mode is for using the 2 stereo channels (4 channels) as the output channels. When using the MOX6/ MOX8 Editor VST, set this parameter to “VST.” 2StereoRec........ The audio signal from A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks is output to the “USB 1/2” channels of the USB TO [HOST] jack. Also, the audio signal from the tone generator is output to the “USB 1/2” channels or the “USB 3/4” channels of the USB TO [HOST] jack. The output channels for the audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] is fixed, but the output channels for audio signal from the tone generator can be selected for each part. The output channel for each part is selected in “USB OUTPUT SELECT” of Performance Common Edit (page 61) or Mixing Common Edit (page 116). NOTE In the Voice mode, the output channel for audio signal from the tone generator is fixed to “USB 3/4.” 1StereoRec........ The audio signal from the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks and the tone generator are output together to the “USB 1/2” channels of the USB TO [HOST] jack. This mode is for using the 1 stereo channels (2 channels) as output channels. DirectMonitorSw A/D In&Part (Direct Monitor Switch A/D Input & Part) Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “USB 1/2” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). When this is set to “on,” the audio signal which is output via the “USB 1/ 2” channels is also output to the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. The audio signal output to “USB 1/2” channels varies depending on the “Mode” setting. When “Mode” is set to “VST,” “DirectMonitorSw A/D In” is indicated in this parameter. Settings: off, on NOTE When the maximum number of output channels for USB is set to 2 channels, “Mode” is fixed to “1StereoRec.“ For details, see the [SF1] OUT CH display (page 148). MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 147 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET DirectMonitorSw Part (Direct Monitor Switch Part) This parameter is shown only when “Mode” is set to “VST” or “2StereoRec.” Determines whether or not the audio signal which is output to the external device via the “USB 3/4” channels also sounds from this instrument (Direct Monitoring). FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL When this is set to “on,” the audio signal which is output via the “USB 3/4” channels is also output to the OUTPUT [L/ [F2] VOICE MONO]/[R] jacks and [PHONES] jack. [F2] SEQ Settings: off, on [F3] VCE A/D [SF1] OUT CH (Output Channel) Pressing this button calls up the display which determines whether the maximum number of output channels for USB is 4 channels (2 stereo channels) or 2 channels (1 stereo channel). If transfer of the audio signal between the MOX6/MOX8 [F4] CTL ASN [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI Utility Job and the computer connected to the MOX6/MOX8 is compromised or impossible, set this parameter to “2ch.” This setting reduces the CPU load of the computer, and may resolve the problem. After changing this setting, press the [ENTER] button, then restart the MOX6/MOX8. NOTICE After changing this setting and pressing the [ENTER] button, make sure to restart the MOX6/MOX8; the instrument will not operate otherwise. Before restarting, make sure to store any important edited data to prevent it from being inadvertently lost. [SF6] INFO (Information) Pressing this button calls up the display which indicates the illustration of the audio connection You can confirm the “Mode” setting and “DirectMonitor Switch” setting here. [F6] MIDI [SF1] CH (Channel) From this display you can make basic MIDI settings. BasicRcvCh (Basic Receive Channel) Determines the MIDI receive channel when this synthesizer is set to single-timbre tone generator mode (Voice/ Performance modes). Settings: 1 – 16, omni (all channels), off NOTE In the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes), each Part receives MIDI data according to its assigned MIDI receive channel ([SONG] or [PATTERN] [MIXING] [EDIT] Part selection [F1] VOICE [SF2] MODE ReceiveCh). KBDTransCh (Keyboard Transmit Channel) Determines the MIDI channel over which the instrument sends MIDI data (to an external sequencer, tone generator, or other device). This parameter is available in the single-timbre tone generator mode (Voice/Performance modes). Settings: 1 – 16, off NOTE In the multi-timbral tone generator mode (Song/Pattern modes), MIDI data generated by playing the keyboard (and its controllers) is sent to the internal tone generator and external devices via the MIDI output channel, set from the CHANNEL display ([SONG] or [PATTERN] [F3] TRACK [SF1] CHANNEL). DeviceNo. (Device Number) Determines the MIDI Device Number. This number must match the Device Number of the external MIDI device when transmitting/receiving bulk data, parameter changes or other system exclusive messages. Settings: 1 – 16, all, off MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 148 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET [SF2] SWITCH BankSel (Bank Select) FILE Utility Mode [F1] GENERAL This switch enables or disables Bank Select messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,” this [F2] VOICE synthesizer responds to incoming Bank Select messages, and it also transmits appropriate Bank Select messages [F2] SEQ (when using the panel). [F3] VCE A/D Settings: off, on PgmChange (Program Change) This switch enables or disables Program Change messages, both in transmission and reception. When this is set to “on,” this synthesizer responds to incoming Program Change messages, and it also transmits appropriate Program Change messages (when using the panel). [F4] CTL ASN [F5] USB I/O [F6] MIDI Utility Job Settings: off, on LocalCtrl (Local Control) This determines whether or not the tone generator of the instrument responds to your keyboard playing. Normally, this should be set to “on” — since you’ll want to hear the sound of the MOX6/MOX8 as you play it. Even if this is set to “off,” the data will be transmitted via MIDI. Also, the internal tone generator block will respond to messages received via MIDI. Settings: off (disconnect), on (connect) RcvBulk (Receive Bulk) Determines whether or not Bulk Dump data can be received. Settings: protect (not received), on (received) [SF3] SYNC (Synchronization) From this display you can set various parameters related to MIDI clock and synchronization. MIDI Sync Determines whether Song/Pattern/Arpeggio playback will be synchronized to the instrument’s internal clock or an external MIDI clock. Settings: internal, external, auto, MTC internal..............................Synchronization to internal clock. You can use this setting when this tone generator is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other equipment. external.............................Synchronization to a MIDI clock received from an external MIDI instrument via MIDI. Use this setting when the external sequencer is to be used as master. auto...................................When MIDI clock is transmitted continuously from an external MIDI device or computer, the internal clock of the MOX6/MOX8 is automatically disabled and the MOX6/MOX8 is synchronized with the external clock. When MIDI clock is not transmitted from the external MIDI device or computer, the internal clock of the MOX6/MOX8 continues to run in sync with the latest received tempo of the external MIDI device or computer (DAW software). This setting is useful when you wish to alternate between external clock and internal clock. MTC (MIDI Time Code) ....Synchronization to an MTC signal received via MIDI. MMC signals are transmitted via MIDI. Use this setting when this synthesizer is to be used as a MIDI slave, such as when synchronized to an MTCcapable MTR. The MTC Sync function is available only in the Song mode. NOTE When MIDI Sync is set to “MTC,” Songs and Arpeggios cannot play back in the Song mode but Patterns and Arpeggios can play back in the Pattern mode. NOTE MTC (MIDI Time Code) allows simultaneous synchronization of multiple audio devices via standard MIDI cables. It includes data corresponding to hours, minutes, seconds, and frames. The MOX6/MOX8 does not transmit MTC. NOTE MMC (MIDI Machine Control) allows remote control of multi Track recorders, MIDI sequencers, etc. A MMC-compatible multi Track recorder, for example, will automatically respond to start, stop, fast forward, and fast reverse operations performed on the controlling sequencer, thus keeping playback of the sequencer and multi Track recorder aligned. NOTE When setting the MOX6/MOX8 so that Arpeggio playback is synchronized to an external MIDI clock, make sure to set the devices so that the MIDI clock from the DAW software/ external MIDI device is properly transmitted to the MOX6/MOX8 from the DAW software/ external MIDI devices. ClockOut Determines whether MIDI clock (F8) messages will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT/USB terminal. Settings: off, on SeqCtrl (Sequencer Control) Determines whether Sequencer Control signals — start, continue, stop, and song position pointer — will be received and/or transmitted via MIDI. Settings: off, in, out, in/out off....................... Not transmitted/recognized. in........................ Recognized, but not transmitted. out...................... Transmitted, but not recognized. in/out.................. Transmitted/recognized. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 149 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Utility Mode MTC StartOffset Determines the specific time code point from which sequence playback starts, when MTC is received. This feature can be used to accurately align playback of this synthesizer with an external MTC-compatible device. [F1] GENERAL [F2] VOICE Settings: Hour: Minute: Second: Frame Hour: 00 – 23 Minute: 00 – 59 Second: 00 – 59 Frame: 00 – 29 [F2] SEQ [F3] VCE A/D [F4] CTL ASN [F5] USB I/O [SF4] OTHER [F6] MIDI Utility Job MIDI IN/OUT Determines which physical output/input terminal(s) will be used for transmitting/receiving MIDI data. Settings: MIDI, USB NOTE The two types of terminals above cannot be used at the same time. Only one of them can be used to transmit/receive MIDI data. BulkInterval Determines the interval time of the Bulk Dump transmission when the Bulk Dump function is used or the Bulk Dump Request is received. Settings: 0 – 900 ms Utility Job In the Utility Job mode, you can restore this synthesizer’s User memory (page 23) to the factory default settings (Factory Set). Please note that the setting of “Power On Auto” on this display will be stored automatically by executing Factory Set. NOTICE When the factory settings are restored, all the Voice, Performance, Song, Pattern, and system settings in the Utility mode you created will be erased. Therefore, you should be careful not to overwrite irreplaceable data. Furthermore, it is wise to regularly create backup copies of important Performance data and system settings to a USB flash-memory device, computer, or the like. NOTE For instructions on executing Factory Set, see the Owner’s Manual. 1 2 1 PowerOn Auto (Power On Auto Factory Set) When this parameter is set to on, turning the power on will restore the User memory to the factory default settings and load the demo Songs and demo Patterns. Normally, this should be set to off. Settings: on, off NOTICE When setting Auto Factory Set to “on” and executing Factory Set, the Factory Set function will automatically be executed each time you turn the power on. When setting the Auto Factory Set parameter to off and pressing the [ENTER] button, the Factory Set will not be executed when turning the power on the next time. 2 Version Indicates the current version of this instrument. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 150 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Quick Setup Quick Setup [F1] SETUP Using Quick Setup can instantly call up appropriate sequencer-related panel settings by selecting convenient preset setups, allowing you to simultaneously and instantly set a variety of important sequencer-related parameters. [F2] AUDIO [F3] MIDI Operation Press the [QUICK SETUP] button. [F1] SETUP This display determines the six Quick Setup settings. This display consists of two pages. Three Quick Setup settings are shown in each page. Use the cursor [u]/[d] buttons to switch between the pages. After completing the settings as desired, select the particular Quick Setup you want to use and then press the [ENTER] button to execute the setup. NOTE Holding the [QUICK SETUP] button and pressing the appropriate [A] (1) – [F] (6) buttons can also execute the corresponding Quick Setup. 1 NAME Determines the name for each Quick Setup. 2 AUDIO Selects the audio setting for each Quick Setup. Each audio setting (“Config1” – “Config6”) can be edited in the [F2] AUDIO display. Settings: Config1 – Config6 3 MIDI Selects the MIDI setting for each Quick Setup. Each MIDI setting (“Config1” – “Config6”) can be edited in the [F3] MIDI display. Settings: Config1 – Config6 The default settings for Quick Setups 1 – 6 are as follows. Quick Setup 1 (DAW Rec) “Audio” = ”Config2” Use this setting when recording the signals from the tone generator and the A/D INPUT [L]/[R] jacks separately to DAW software, and playing the signals from the OUTPUT [L/MONO]/[R] jacks directly. Mode DirectMonitorSw A/D In DirectMonitorSw Part 2StereoRec on on “MIDI”=”Config1” Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance (not including Arpeggio data) to the DAW software. LocalCtrl MIDI Sync ClockOut ArpOutSw KBDTransCh TrIntSw TrExtSw off auto off all off 1 all on all on Quick Setup 2 (Arp Rec) “Audio”=”Config2” This setting is same as the Quick Setup 1. “MIDI”=”Config2” Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW software. Keep in mind that this is for recording Arpeggios for which “KeyMode” is set to “sort” or “thru.” LocalCtrl MIDI Sync ClockOut ArpOutSw KBDTransCh TrIntSw TrExtSw on auto off all on off all on all off MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 151 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE Quick Setup Quick Setup 3 (Drct Arp) “Audio”=”Config2” This setting is same as Quick Setup 1. [F1] SETUP “MIDI”= ”Config3” Use this setting when recording this instrument’s performance including Arpeggio data to the DAW software. Keep in mind that this is for recording Arpeggios for which “KeyMode” is set to “direct,” “sortdirect,” or “thrudirect.” LocalCtrl MIDI Sync ClockOut ArpOutSw KBDTransCh TrIntSw TrExtSw on auto off all on 1 all on all on [F2] AUDIO [F3] MIDI Quick Setup 4 (St Alone) “Audio”=”Config2” This setting is same as Quick Setup 1. “MIDI”=”Config4” Use this setting when this instrument is to be used alone or as the master clock source for other equipment. LocalCtrl MIDI Sync ClockOut ArpOutSw KBDTransCh TrIntSw TrExtSw on internal on all off 1 all on all on Quick Setup 5 (VST Rec) “Audio” = “Config4” Use this setting when using the MOX6/MOX8 Editor VST to record MIDI data to the DAW software. Mode DirectMonitorSw A/D In DirectMonitorSw Part VST On On “MIDI” = “Config1” This setting is same as Quick Setup 1. Quick Setup 6 (VST Play) “Audio” = “Config1” Use this setting when using the MOX6/MOX8 Editor VST to play this instrument sound on the DAW software. Mode DirectMonitorSw A/D In DirectMonitorSw Part VST On off “MIDI” = “Config1” This setting is same as Quick Setup 1. [F2] AUDIO Determines the audio signal settings for the selected Config. These settings are same as in the [F5] USB I/O display (page 147) in the Utility mode. To switch among Config 1 – 6, use the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. [F3] MIDI Determines the parameters related to the connections to an external MIDI device. The function of each editable parameter is same as the following parameters. To switch among Config 1 – 6, use the [SF1] – [SF6] buttons. LocalCtrl (Local Control) Utility mode [F6] MIDI [SF2] SWITCH “LocalCtrl” (page 149) MIDI Sync Utility mode [F6] MIDI [SF2] SYNC “MIDI Sync” (page 149) ClockOut Utility mode [F6] MIDI [SF2] SYNC “ClockOut” (page 149) TrIntSw (Track Internal Switch) Song /Pattern mode [F3] TRACK [SF2] OUT SW “INT SW” (page 78) TrExtSw (Track External Switch) Song /Pattern mode [F3] TRACK [SF2] OUT SW “EXT SW” (page 78) ArpOutSw (Arpeggio Output Switch) Performance/Song/ Pattern mode ARP [EDIT] [F6] OUT CH “OutputSwitch” (page 58) KBDTransCh (Keyboard Transmit Channel) Utility mode [F6] MIDI [SF1] CH “KBDTransCh” (page 148) MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 152 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE File Mode File Mode [F1] CONFIG The File mode provides tools for transferring data (such as Voice, Performance, Song, and Pattern) between the MOX6/ MOX8 and external storage devices such as USB flash memory or a hard disk unit connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. The file types available differ depending on the mode selected before calling up the File mode. [F2] SAVE [F3] LOAD [F4] RENAME Operation [F5] DELETE Press the [FILE] button. Supplementary Information Terminology in the File mode File The term “file” is used to define a collection of data stored on a USB flash memory device or a hard disk drive of a computer. Just as with a computer, various data types such as Voice, Performance, Song and Pattern created on the MOX6/MOX8 can be treated as a file and saved to a USB flash memory device. Each file has a file name and a file extension. File Name Just as with a computer, you can assign the name to the file in the File mode. The file name can contain up to eight alphabetical characters on the display of the MOX6/MOX8. Files having the same name cannot be saved in the same directory. Extension The three letters following the file name (after the period) such as “.mid” and “.wav” are referred to as a file “extension.” The extension indicates the type of file and cannot be changed by panel operations on the MOX6/MOX8. The file mode of the MOX6/MOX8 supports six different extension types, according to the particular data. File Size This refers to the memory amount of the file. The file size is determined by the amount of data saved to the file. File sizes are indicated in conventional computer terms by B (byte), KB (kilobyte), MB (megabyte) and GB (gigabyte). 1KB is equivalent to 1024 bytes, 1MB is equivalent to 1024KB, and 1GB is equivalent to 1024MB. Storage Refers to a memory storage unit (such as a hard disk) to which the file is saved. This instrument can handle and mount various USB flash memory devices connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. Directory (Dir) This is an organizational feature on a data storage device (such as hard disk), allowing you to group data files together according to type or application. Directories can be nested in hierarchical order for organizing data. In this regard, a “directory” is equivalent to a folder as used on a computer. The File mode of the MOX6/MOX8 allows you to assign a name to a directory just as with a file. Please note that the directory name does not contain an extension. Hierarchical Structure (Tree Structure) If you’ve saved a large number of files to memory or hard disk, you’ll want to organize those files into proper folders. Also, if you have a large number of files and folders, you’ll want to organize those folders into a hierarchical structure, where multiple folders are grouped into relevant ‘parent’ folders, and so on. The very top location for all your folders (which is called up when you first open the memory location or hard disk) is called the “root directory.” Changing the current directory (folder) Root directory Directory A Directory C Directory B Directory D Using the illustration above as an example, this shows you how to change the current directory. First, open the root directory to find directories A and B. Next, open directory A to find directories C and D. Finally, open directory C to find only the files saved in directory C. This allows you to call up folders nested down in the lower levels of the folder hierarchy. To select a different directory higher up (for example, moving from directory C to directory B), first go to the MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 153 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET next highest level (directory A). Next, go up one more level (to the root directory). Now that both A and B are available, open directory B. In this way you can move up or down as desired through the folder hierarchy. FILE File Mode [F1] CONFIG Path [F2] SAVE The location of the directories (folders) and files currently indicated at the “Dir” line on the display is referred to as a [F3] LOAD “path.” This indicates the current directory, which device it belongs to, and in which folder(s) it is contained. “Directory C” illustrated above is described as path “USB_HDD/A/C.” Mount [F4] RENAME [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information Refers to the operation that enables an external memory device for use with the instrument. A USB flash memory device is automatically mounted as soon as it is connected to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal on the rear panel of the MOX6/ MOX8. The reverse procedure (removing) is called “Unmount.” Format The operation of initializing a storage device (such as a hard disk) is referred to as “format.” The format operation erases all data from the target memory device and is irreversible. Save/Load “Save” means that the data created on the MOX6/MOX8 is saved to the USB flash memory as a file, while “Store” means that the data created on the MOX6/MOX8 is stored to internal memory. “Load” means that the file on the USB flash memory is loaded to internal memory. [F1] CONFIG (Configuration) [SF1] CURRENT Indicates the currently recognized USB flash memory device. Status Free Indicates the amount of free capacity for the currently recognized USB flash memory device. Status Total Indicates the amount of total memory for the currently recognized USB flash memory device. [SF2] FORMAT Formats the USB flash memory device connected to the instrument. Before you can use a new USB flash memory device with the MOX6/MOX8, you will need to format it. For instructions on formatting, see page 159. Volume Label Determines the name of the Volume Label. The name can contain up to eleven characters, and is entered by using the [DATA] dial and cursor [<]/[>] buttons. Pressing the [SF6] button calls up the character list for entering the name. For detailed instructions on naming, see the “Basic Operation” of the Owner’s Manual. Free Indicates the amount of free/total memory for the currently recognized USB flash memory device. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 154 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE File Mode [F2] SAVE [F1] CONFIG Currently selected directory File name [F2] SAVE [F3] LOAD [F4] RENAME [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information File/Directory selection box This operation lets you save files to a USB flash memory device. For specific operating procedures, see the Owner’s Manual. TYPE Among the various types of data created on this synthesizer, you can save all of them or only a specific type of data to a single file. This parameter determines which specific type of data will be saved to a single file. Settings: The file types which can be saved are as follows. File types Extension Descriptions All .X4A All data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to USB flash memory. AllVoice .X4V All the User Voice data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to USB flash memory. However, the Mixing Voice cannot be saved. AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X4G All the User Arpeggio data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to USB flash memory. AllSong .X4S All the User Song data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to USB flash memory. The Song data includes Mixing settings and Mixing Voices. AllPattern .X4P All the User Pattern data in this synthesizer’s internal User Memory (Flash ROM) is treated as a single file, and can be saved to USB flash memory. The Pattern data includes Mixing settings and Mixing Voices. SMF (Standard MIDI File) .MID Sequence Track (1 – 16) and Tempo Track data of Songs or Patterns created in the Song/Pattern mode can be saved to USB flash memory as Standard MIDI File (format 0) data. NOTE This instrument is not compatible with the MOTIF XS6/7/8, MOTIF XF6/7/8, and MO6/MO8. [SF1] EXEC (Execute) Pressing this button saves the file to the currently selected directory. NOTE To open the selected directory, press the [ENTER] button. [SF2] SET NAME Pressing this button copies the file/directory name selected at the file/directory selection box to the file name location. [SF3] NEW Pressing this button creates a new directory in the current directory. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 155 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE File Mode [F3] LOAD [F1] CONFIG [F2] SAVE Currently selected folder (directly) [F3] LOAD [F4] RENAME [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information File/Folder selection box This operation lets you load files from a USB flash memory device to this synthesizer. You can also perform on the keyboard while playing backing parts from an SMF file contained in the USB flash memory. For details, see page 158. TYPE Among the various types of data saved in a single file on a USB flash memory, you can load all of them to this synthesizer at once or only a specific, desired type of data. This parameter determines which specific type of data will be loaded from a single file. Settings: The file types which can be loaded are as follows. File Types Extension* Descriptions All .X4A Files of the “All” type saved to USB flash memory can be loaded and restored to the instrument. When “All” is selected as a file type to be loaded, “ with System” appears in the display. If this box is unchecked and the Load is executed, all data with the exception of the system settings in the Utility mode is loaded. AllVoice .X4V Files of the “AllVoice” type saved to USB flash memory can be loaded and restored to the instrument. 1BankVoice — The Voices in the selected Bank of the file saved as an “All”/”AllVoice” type can be loaded. Please note that the file icons F of “W4A” and “W4V” are changed to G (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected. When selecting this file and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Voice Bank list of the file and the load destination are indicated. Select the source Voice Bank for loading in the box located at the right of the display. Voice — A specified Voice in a file that is saved to USB flash memory as an “All” or “All Voice” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons F of “W4A” and “W4V” are changed to G (as virtual folders) when this file type is selected. When selecting this file type and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Voice Bank list of the file is indicated. When selecting the Bank and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Voice list of the selected Bank and the load destination are indicated. Select the source Voice for loading in the box located at the right of the display, and select the destination Voice for loading at the left of the display. 1BankPerform — The Performances in the selected Bank of the file saved as an “All” can be saved. Please note that the file icons F of “X4A” are changed to G (as virtual directories) when this file type is selected. When selecting this file and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Performance Bank list of the file and the load destination are indicated. Select the source Performance Bank for loading in the box located at the right of the display, and select the destination Performance Bank for loading at the left of the display. Performance — A specified Performance in a file that is saved to USB flash memory as an “All” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons F of “X4A” are changed to G (as virtual directories) when this file type is selected. When selecting this file and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Performance Bank list of the file is indicated. When selecting the Bank and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Performance list of the selected Bank and the load destination are indicated. Select the source Performance for loading in the box located at the right of the display, and select the destination Performance for loading at the left of the display. AllArp (All Arpeggio) .X4G Files of the “AllArp” type saved to the USB flash memory can be loaded and restored to the instrument. AllSong .X4S Files of the “AllSong” type saved to the USB flash memory can be loaded and restored to the instrument. Song AllPattern — .X4P MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual A specified Song in a file that is saved to the USB flash memory as an “All” or “All Song” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons F of “X4A” or “X4S” are changed to G (as virtual directories) when this file type is selected. When selecting this file and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Song list of the file and the load destination are indicated. Select the source Song for loading in the box located at the right of the display, and select the destination Song for loading at the left of the display. In addition, selecting this file type lets you load Standard MIDI files (format 0, 1) to a specific Song. Files of the “AllPattern” type saved to USB flash memory can be loaded and restored to the instrument. 156 VOICE PERF File Types SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Extension* Descriptions — A specified Pattern in a file that is saved to the USB flash memory as an “All” or “AllPattern” type can be individually selected and loaded to the instrument. Please note that the file icons F of “X4A” and “X4P” are changed to G (as virtual directories) when this file type is selected. When selecting this file and then pressing the [ENTER] button, the Pattern list of the file and the load destination are indicated. Select the source Pattern for loading in the box located at the right of the display, and select the destination Pattern at the left of the display. In addition, selecting this file type lets you load a Standard MIDI file (format 0, 1) to a specific Section of a Pattern. Pattern * Assigned to the file which can be loaded. FILE File Mode [F1] CONFIG [F2] SAVE [F3] LOAD [F4] RENAME [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information NOTE This instrument is not compatible with the MOTIF XS6/7/8, MOTIF XF6/7/8, and MO6/MO8. [SF1] EXEC (Execute) Loads the selected file. NOTE To enter the selected directory, press the [ENTER] button. [F4] RENAME Select the desired file type. Select the file/folder to be renamed. Rename the selected file/folder here. Rename the selected file/directory here. You can rename files using up to eight alphabetic and numeric characters. Files are named according to MS-DOS naming conventions. If the file name contains spaces and other characters unrecognized in MS-DOS, these characters will automatically be replaced by “_” (underscore) characters when saving. [SF1] EXEC (Execute) Rename the selected file. NOTE To open the selected directory, press the [ENTER]. [SF2] SET NAME Pressing this button copies the file/directory name selected at the file/directory selection box to the file name location. [SF3] NEW Pressing this button creates a new directory in the current directory. [F5] DELETE Select the desired file type. Select the file or directory to be deleted. From this display you can delete files/directories from the selected USB flash memory device. Select the desired file or folder as shown above, then press the [SF1] EXEC button. NOTE When you wish to delete a directory, delete all the files contained in the directory beforehand. Please keep in mind that only folders that contain no files or other nested directories can be deleted. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 157 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET FILE File Mode Supplementary Information [F1] CONFIG [F2] SAVE File/Folder selection The illustrations and instructions below show you how to select files and directories on a USB flash memory device [F3] LOAD [F4] RENAME within the File mode. [F5] DELETE Supplementary Information To return to the next highest level, press the [EXIT] button. To go to the next lowest level, highlight the desired directory and press the [ENTER] button. Select the directory or file by using the [DATA] dial and [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Playing back a SMF (Standard MIDI file) from USB flash memory In the File mode, you can directly play back a SMF file saved in a USB flash memory device. This function is convenient in live performance, since it lets you easily use SMF data as accompaniment while you play the keyboard. 1 Connect the USB flash memory including the SMF file device to this instrument. 2 Enter the Song mode or Pattern mode, then select the desired Song or Pattern. 3 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode. 4 Press the [F3] LOAD button to call up the Load display. 5 Move the cursor to “TYPE,” then select the “Song” or “Pattern.” 6 Select the SMF file. 7 Press the [F6] R (Play) button to play back the SMF file with the Mixing settings of the currently selected Song or Pattern. Press the [SF2] J (Stop) button again to stop playback. 8 Try playing the keyboard along with the accompaniment of the SMF file. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 158 VOICE PERF SONG PATTERN MIX MASTER REMOTE UTILITY QUICK SET Formatting a USB flash memory device Before you can use a new USB flash memory device with this instrument, you will need to format it. The correct way to format such a device is as follows. NOTICE If data is already saved to the USB flash memory device, be careful not to format it. If you format the device, all previously recorded data will be deleted. Make sure to check beforehand whether or not the device contains important data. FILE File Mode [F1] CONFIG [F2] SAVE [F3] LOAD [F4] RENAME [F5] DELETE 1 Connect a USB flash memory device to the USB [TO DEVICE] terminal. 2 Press the [FILE] button to enter the File mode. 3 Press the [F1] CONFIG button, then the [SF2] FORMAT button to call up the Format display. 4 Set the Volume Label. Supplementary Information Move the cursor to the “Volume Label” and input a Volume Label (up to 11 characters) by using the [DATA] dial and cursor [<]/[>] buttons. Pressing the [SF6] button calls up a character list for easy entry. 5 Press the [ENTER] button. (The display prompts you for confirmation.) Press the [EXIT] button to cancel the Format operation. 6 Press the [ENTER] to button execute the Format operation. After formatting has been completed, a “Completed” message appears and operation returns to the original display. NOTICE While formatting is in process, make sure to follow these precautions: • Never remove or eject the USB flash memory from the device. • Never unplug or disconnect any of the devices • Never turn off the power of the MOX6/MOX8 or the relevant devices. NOTE By executing the Format operation in the File mode, the USB flash memory device will be formatted to MS-DOS or Windows format. The formatted device may not be compatible with other devices, such as a Mac computer or digital camera. MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 159 Basic Structure Appendix Functional blocks Tone Generator block About MIDI A/D Input block MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to Arpeggio block communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and Controller block various other types of MIDI data, or messages. This synthesizer can control other MIDI devices by transmitting note Effect block related data and various types of controller data. It can also be controlled by incoming MIDI messages which Internal memory Sequencer block automatically determine the tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices specified for the various Parts. For detailed information of the MIDI messages that can be handled by the MOX6/MOX8, see the “Data List” PDF document. For details on MIDI, see the “Synthesizer Parameter Manual” PDF document. This section explains only information specific to the MOX6/MOX8. Reference Voice mode Performance mode • Channel Mode Messages Song mode Reset All Controllers (Control No. 121) Pattern mode The following parameters are affected: Mixing mode ControllerSet Disabled Master mode LFOBoxSet Disabled Remote mode Pitch Bend 64 Utility mode Aftertouch 0 (off) Quick setup Modulation 0 (off) File mode Expression 127 (Max) Sustain 0 (off) Sostenuto 0 (off) Portamento Cancels the Portamento source key number Foot Controller 127 Ribbon Controller 64 Breath Controller 127 Appendix MIDI Assign Knob 64 Assign Switch 0 RPN Number not specified; internal data will not be changed. NRPN Yamaha Web Site (English) http://www.yamahasynth.com/ Yamaha Manual Library http://www.yamaha.co.jp/manual/ U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division ©2011 Yamaha Corporation B0 MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual 160
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf PDF Version : 1.6 Linearized : Yes Encryption : Standard V1.2 (40-bit) User Access : Print, Copy, Fill forms, Extract, Assemble, Print high-res XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 4.2.1-c043 52.372728, 2009/01/18-15:08:04 Producer : Acrobat Distiller 9.4.6 (Windows) Creator Tool : FrameMaker 8.0 Modify Date : 2011:12:07 19:20:10+09:00 Create Date : 2011:11:08 14:26:34Z Metadata Date : 2011:12:07 19:20:10+09:00 Format : application/pdf Title : MOX6/MOX8 Reference Manual Creator : U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division, Yamaha Corporation Description : mox6mox8_en_rm_b0 Document ID : uuid:e94b34ae-3a2b-4595-8d03-b058a7fdb893 Instance ID : uuid:e9e8e84c-9c99-4240-9f1f-f0211f03306e Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 160 Author : U.R.G., Digital Musical Instruments Division, Yamaha Corporation Subject : mox6mox8_en_rm_b0EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools